mid-penn engineering corporation #2.pdfoct 26, 2016  · this addendum forms a part of the contract...

170
Building Better Communities Page 1 of 4 MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION 2049 WEST MARKET STREET LEWISBURG, PENNSYLVANIA, 17837 PHONE: 570-524-2214 E-MAIL: [email protected] Wellness Building Addition & Renovation for The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness ADDENDUM #2 October 26, 2016 This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September 26, 2016. Bidders shall carefully examine the Project Specifications for revised and updated items. NOTE: Bidders must acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on their Bid Form. The contract documents are amended as follows: CLARIFICATIONS: 1. Who is responsible for the Athletic Flooring? The athletic flooring is Owner Provided, Owner Installed. The GC is responsible for all floor preparation as required by flooring manufacturers including but not limited to: shot blasting / grinding, patching, moisture testing and remediation and leveling of existing slab. 2. Who is responsible for the Turf Field? The athletic flooring is Owner Provided, Owner Installed. The GC is responsible for all floor preparation as required by flooring manufacturers including but not limited to: shot blasting / grinding, patching, moisture testing and remediation and leveling of existing slab. 3. Who is responsible for the exterior slab concrete/Sidewalks that is touching the building? (See attached Mark-up) The Site Contractor is responsible for concrete sidewalk and is not part of the building scope. AS1.10 mark-up indicates clarification and is attached to this addendum. 4. Who is responsible for the exterior Column Footers and Piers? (See attached Mark-up) The Building contractor is responsible for column footers and piers related to all exterior canopies, ramps and stairs. 5. Who is responsible for the exterior stairs? (See attached Mark-up) The Building contractor is responsible for all concrete stairs and railings. 6. Who is responsible for the site equipment pads? The Building contractor is responsible for the equipment pad and railings.

Upload: others

Post on 24-Mar-2020

2 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Better Communities Page 1 of 4

MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION

2049 WEST MARKET STREET LEWISBURG, PENNSYLVANIA, 17837 PHONE: 570-524-2214 E-MAIL: [email protected]

Wellness Building Addition & Renovation for The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness

ADDENDUM #2

October 26, 2016

This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September 26, 2016. Bidders shall carefully examine the Project Specifications for revised and updated items. NOTE: Bidders must acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on their Bid Form. The contract documents are amended as follows: CLARIFICATIONS:

1. Who is responsible for the Athletic Flooring?

The athletic flooring is Owner Provided, Owner Installed. The GC is responsible for all floor preparation as required by flooring manufacturers including but not limited to: shot blasting / grinding, patching, moisture testing and remediation and leveling of existing slab.

2. Who is responsible for the Turf Field?

The athletic flooring is Owner Provided, Owner Installed. The GC is responsible for

all floor preparation as required by flooring manufacturers including but not limited to: shot blasting / grinding, patching, moisture testing and remediation and leveling of existing slab.

3. Who is responsible for the exterior slab concrete/Sidewalks that is touching the building?

(See attached Mark-up)

The Site Contractor is responsible for concrete sidewalk and is not part of the building scope. AS1.10 mark-up indicates clarification and is attached to this addendum.

4. Who is responsible for the exterior Column Footers and Piers? (See attached Mark-up)

The Building contractor is responsible for column footers and piers related to all

exterior canopies, ramps and stairs.

5. Who is responsible for the exterior stairs? (See attached Mark-up)

The Building contractor is responsible for all concrete stairs and railings.

6. Who is responsible for the site equipment pads?

The Building contractor is responsible for the equipment pad and railings.

Page 2: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Better Communities Page 2 of 4

7. What is the existing roof type? Do you know the existing building manufacture?

The existing roof is metal rib panel. The existing building manufacturer is not known.

8. On sheet A6.2 nothing is called out for bathroom accessories. Do these bathrooms get bathroom accessories?

Sheet A6.1 indicates typical toilet and shower accessories and shall be included in all restrooms.

9. Drawings A7.1 –A7.3 has just a “?” is some of the call out boxes. Please clarify what you want at these locations.

Drawings A7.1 – 7.3 have been revised to clarify materials previously shown with a ‘?’ along with revisions to the ceramic tile heights and locations and are included with this Addendum.

10. Drawings A7.7 Details 2 & 3 do not have the sizes of the cabinetry. Please specify what size at these locations.

Drawing A7.7 has been revised to show casework tags and is included with this Addendum.

11. Drawings A7.8 Detail 4, who is providing the Double Wall Mounted Bar and Brackets called out as A716?

The contractor is to provide the Double Bar and Brackets. Basis of design shall be: Doubler En Lair Double Wall Mounted Bracket, Stainless Steel, with Stained Maple Barre by Custom Bares. A similar bar is also located in Multi-Use ‘C’ and a 25’ bar shall be located in Group Fitness.

12. What is the existing footer depth?

The existing footer depth is unknown.

13. Will there be another bid date extension?

The current bid date is November 10th @ 2:00 P.M.

14. Drawing A1.3b shows roof drains and overflow drains on the roof in the lower right corner. These are not indicated on the plumbing drawings.

The roof and overflow drains are part of the project scope. The work described by the drawings on any one discipline may be affected by the work described on drawings of another discipline and may require reference to drawings of another discipline.

15. The Multiple Contract Summary spec 011200-3, 1.5 A 8. states that each sub-contractor is to perform their own saw-cutting and removal of concrete floor and the GC just does the patching. Drawing AD1.1 note D3.3 indicates that the GC will remove concrete floor. Please confirm that you want the GC to perform all cutting and patching.

The GC is responsible for all cutting and patching or for coordinating specific requirements with their respective sub-contractors.

Page 3: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Better Communities Page 3 of 4

16. Could the project budget please be disclosed for bonding purposes?

The project budget for bonding purposes was made available in Addendum #1 and is

estimated to be $6M - $8M

17. Please confirm that the domestic water BFP(s) and water meter(s) are by the site contractor.

Yes these requirements are by the site contractor.

18. Do not see a spec for underground domestic water piping in DIV. 22. Please confirm that the site contractor is extending both domestic water lines up into the building.

Yes these requirements are by the site contractor.

19. All base cabinets marked as 222 have been revised to be 212.

20. The 2” and 3” communication conduits and (2) 4” electrical service conduits for Area ‘F’ shall be

extended within the demising wall 1’-0” and capped in lieu of 5’-0” as indicated.

PROJECT MAUNAL MODIFICATIONS:

1. The following sections have been removed from the Table of Contents and are not part of the specifications:

a. Section 06 16 00 “Sheathing” b. Section 09 65 66 “Resilient Athletic Flooring” c. Section 09 93 00 “Staining and Transparent Finishing” d. Section 10 21 16 “Shower and Dressing Accessories” e. Section 23 25 00 “HVAC Water Treatment” f. Section 23 57 00 “Heat Exchangers for HVAC”

2. The following specification have been uploaded to the ftp site and shall be included in the project

manual:

a. Section 07 71 00 “Roof Specialties” b. Section 08 41 13 “Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefront” c. Section 08 43 14 “Interior Aluminum Storefront” d. Section 08 44 13 “Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls e. Section 08 71 00 “Door Hardware” f. Section 08 80 00 “Glazing” g. Section 08 83 00 “Mirrors” h. Section 08 87 00 “Glazing Surface Films” i. Section 08 90 00 “Louvers and Vents” j. Section 09 70 00 “Resinous Flooring” k. Section 09 84 33 “Sound Absorbing Wall Units l. Division 10 - Specialties.

Page 4: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Better Communities Page 4 of 4

3. Section 09 91 13 “Exterior Painting” and Section 09 91 23 “Interior Painting” have been combined into Section 09 91 00 “Painting” references in the drawings to interior or exterior painting shall correspond with this section.

4. Section 03 35 43 “Polished Concrete Finishing” has been added to the Table of Contents.

DRAWING MODIFICATIONS: All modified drawings labeled as delta 2 "10/26/16 Addendum #2" are to be considered part of Addendum #2. Below outlines the revisions.

1. Drawing A1.3b - Roof Enlarged Plan: the referenced specification section for roof drain and overflow drain should be 07 53 50 “Roof Drains”

2. Drawings A7.1 – 7.3 and A7.7 have been revised and are included with this Addendum.

3. Drawings A9.3 and A9.3.1 Modular Casework have been added to the documents and are included with this Addendum.

4. Drawing A8.5 – All door glass shall be renamed to be GL-1T

5. 9/A8.5 – Glass shall be revised to be spandrel panel, type GL-2T

6. 1/A7.5 – Sink base has been revised to be type 154

7. Main Level Plumbing Plan on Drawing P1.0- 2” water line to Area ‘F’ shall be extended 20’-0” to the west and extended within the demising wall 5’-0” and capped.

8. Electrical Service Schematic on Drawing E6.1- Feeder designation 800.4W1G shall be 2 sets of 3-1/2” conduit with 4-500 & 1-500G copper conductors in each.

9. Drawing AD1.1 has been revised with an increase to the extents of the floor demolition required for the slab remediation. Demolition area shall be 30’ beyond the distressed area which now corresponds to the geotech report and detail 19/AD4.1.

10. The following drawings have been removed from the Sheet Index and are not part of the Contract Documents:

A1.0 Wall Type Schedule M2.1 Main Level Mechanical Piping Plan M5.1 Enlarged Mechanical Plans

This concludes Addendum #2.

Please direct any questions to Jeremy Berry-Propst @ Mid-Penn Engineering Corp.

(570) 524-2214 or [email protected]

Page 5: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for TABLE OF CONTENTS The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 001113 - 1

SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME ONE:

Division 00 - Contracts & Bidding ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 00 01 10 Table of Contents 00 11 13 Advertisement for Bids 00 11 16 Invitation to Bid 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders 00 22 13 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders 00 25 13 Prebid Meetings 00 26 00 Procurement Substitution Procedures 00 31 13 Preliminary Schedule 00 31 19 Existing Condition Information 00 31 26 Existing Hazardous Material Information 00 31 32 Geotechnical Data 00 41 13 Bid Form – Stipulated Sun 00 43 13 Bid Security Forms 00 43 23 Alternates Form 00 43 73 Proposed Schedule of Values Form 00 43 93 Bid Submittal Checklist 00 60 00 Project Forms Division 01 - General Requirements ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 01 11 00 Summary 01 12 00 Multiple Contract summary 01 23 00 Alternates 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 26 00 Contract Modification procedures 01 29 00 Payment Procedures 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements 01 42 00 References 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 55 26 Traffic Regulation 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 73 00 Execution 01 73 10 Cutting and Patching 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 01 78 23 Operation & Maintenance Data 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training Division 02 - Existing Conditions ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 02 01 00 Restoration of Underground Pipe, Repair Of Broken Pipe 02 41 19 Selective Structure Demolition Division 03 - Concrete ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 03 01 30 Maintenance of Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete

Page 6: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for TABLE OF CONTENTS The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 001113 - 2

03 35 43 Polished Concrete 03 45 00 Precast Architectural Concrete 03 54 16 Hydraulic Cement Underlayment Division 04 - Masonry --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 04 26 13 Adhered Masonry Veneer Installation System 04 43 13.16 Architectural Cast Stone Masonry Veneer Division 05 - Metals ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 12 13 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing 05 21 00 Steel Joist Framing 05 31 00 Steel Decking 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 51 00 Metal Stairs 05 73 00 Decorative Metal Railings Division 06 - Wood & Plastic ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 16 00 Sheathing 06 41 13 Wood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Cabinets 06 41 16 Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets Division 07 - Thermal & Moisture Protection ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 07 01 50.19 Preparation for Re-Roofing 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 25 00 Weather Barriers 07 41 13.16 Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels 07 42 13.13 Formed Metal Wall Panels 07 53 23 Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing 07 53 50 Roof Drains 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim 07 71 00 Roof Specialties 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping 07 84 46 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems 07 92 00 Joint Sealants Division 08 - Doors & Windows ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 08 31 00 Access Doors & Frames 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 42 29 Automatic Entrances 08 43 14 Interior Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing 08 83 00 Mirrors 08 87 00 Glazing Surface Films

Page 7: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for TABLE OF CONTENTS The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 001113 - 3

08 90 00 Louvers and Vents Division 09 - Finishes ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 09 29 00 Gypsum Board Systems 09 30 00 Tiling 09 51 23 Acoustical Tile Ceiling 09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting 09 70 00 Resinous Flooring 09 84 33 Sound-Absorbing Wall Units 09 91 00 Painting Division 10 - Specialties ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10 14 00 Graphics 10 14 19 Dimensional Letter Signage 10 14 23 Panel Signage 10 21 13 Toilet Compartments 10 22 13 Wire Mesh Partitions 10 22 26 Operable Partitions 10 26 00 Wall and Door Protection 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 10 44 13 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers 10 51 23 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Lockers Division 11 - Equipment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11 13 00 Loading Dock Equipment 11 14 13 Pedestrian Gates 11 52 23 Television Mounting Brackets Division 12 - Furnishings ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12 24 13 Roller Window Shades 12 36 61 Simulated Stone Countertops VOLUME TWO: Division 21 – Fire Suppression ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21 05 00 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 21 13 13 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems Division 22 - Plumbing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 16 Expansion Fittings 22 05 23 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Controls 22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing and Piping Equipment 22 07 16 Plumbing Equipment Insulation 22 07 19 Plumbing Pipe Insulation 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping

Page 8: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for TABLE OF CONTENTS The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 001113 - 4

22 11 20 Facility Natural-Gas Piping 22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 22 35 00 Domestic-Water Heat Exhangers 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures 22 42 00 Plumbing Specialties 22 47 00 Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers Division 23 - HVAC ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 07 13 Duct Insulation 23 07 19 HVAC Pipe Insulation 23 09 00 Building Automation Systems 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping 23 31 13 Metal Ducts 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators 23 36 16 Air Terminal Units – Variable Volume 23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 23 73 39 Thermal Economizer Units 23 74 16.11 Packaged Small Capacity Rooftop Units 23 74 16.13 Packaged Large Capacity Rooftop Units 23 74 33 Dedicated Outdoor Units 23 82 16 Hydronic Air Coils Division 26 - Electrical ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 01 Equipment Connections and Coordination 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 36 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 73 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices 26 23 00 Low-Voltage Switchgear 26 24 13 Switchboards 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 13 Fuses 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 51 00 Interior Lighting Division 27 - Communications ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 27 11 00 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling Division 28 - Electronic Safety & Security

Page 9: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for TABLE OF CONTENTS The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 001113 - 5

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 28 13 00 Access Control 28 23 00 Video Surveillance 28 31 11 Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System Appendix -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Appendix ‘A’ Geotechnical Report

END OF SECTION

Page 10: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Addition to Elwell Hall, Bloomsburg University of PA Roof Specialties Project #401-BL-954 07 71 00

1 of 9

SECTION 07 71 00 ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Copings. 2. Roof-edge flashings. 3. Roof-edge drainage systems. 4. Reglets and counterflashings.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for custom- and site-fabricated sheet metal

flashing and trim. 3. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches,

vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units. 4. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants between roof specialties and

adjacent materials.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressures:

1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

Page 11: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Addition to Elwell Hall, Bloomsburg University of PA Roof Specialties Project #401-BL-954 07 71 00

2 of 9

B. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work. Include the following:

1. Details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including direction of expansion and contraction.

2. Pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. 3. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 4. Details of special conditions.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of roof specialty indicated with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For copings, roof-edge flashings, roof-edge drainage systems, and reglets and counterflashings made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components including fasteners, cover joints, accessories, and attachments.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for copings and roof-edge flashings.

B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof specialties installation.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

Page 12: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Addition to Elwell Hall, Bloomsburg University of PA Roof Specialties Project #401-BL-954 07 71 00

3 of 9

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXPOSED METALS

A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 or H01 temper.

1. Non-Patinated Exposed Finish: Mill.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal

surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. System consisting of primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight.

b. Concealed Surface: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, finished as follows:

1. Exposed High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. System consisting of primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight.

D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

E. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.

1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with

ASTM A 755/A 755M. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. System consisting of primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight.

2.2 CONCEALED METALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

D. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.

Page 13: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Addition to Elwell Hall, Bloomsburg University of PA Roof Specialties Project #401-BL-954 07 71 00

4 of 9

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Ultra. c. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment.

B. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color of sheet metal.

2. Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze, or passivated Series 300 stainless steel.

3. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 4. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. 5. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip

zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.

D. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

F. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

G. Solder for Copper: ASTM B 32, lead-free solder.

2.5 COPINGS

A. Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of formed-metal coping cap in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage; corner units, end cap units, and concealed splice plates with same finish as coping caps.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Cheney Flashing Company.

Page 14: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Addition to Elwell Hall, Bloomsburg University of PA Roof Specialties Project #401-BL-954 07 71 00

5 of 9

b. Hickman Company, W. P. c. National Sheet Metal Systems, Inc. d. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.

2. Coping-Cap Material: Formed aluminum, 0.050 inch thick.

a. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Corners: Factory mitered and continuously welded or mechanically clinched and sealed watertight.

4. Coping-Cap Attachment Method: Snap-on, fabricated from coping-cap material. 5. Snap-on-Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, 16 gauge galvanized-steel sheet, 12 inches

wide, with integral cleats. 6. Face Leg Cleats: Concealed, continuous 24 gauge galvanized-steel sheet.

2.6 ROOF-EDGE FLASHINGS

A. Formed Drip Edge: Manufactured, two-piece, roof-edge fascia consisting of snap-on metal fascia cover in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet and a continuous formed- or extruded-aluminum anchor bar with integral drip-edge cleat to engage fascia cover. Provide matching corner units.

1. Fascia Cover: Fabricated from the following exposed metal:

a. Formed Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.

2. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight. 3. Splice Plates: Concealed, of same material, finish, and shape as fascia cover. 4. Face height: As indicated on drawings. 5. Face Leg Cleats: Concealed, continuous 24 gauge galvanized-steel sheet w/ 1" Leg min

over top of wall.

B. Aluminum Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.7 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

A. Gutters: Manufactured in uniform section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, with matching corner units, ends, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch above front edge. Furnish flat-stock gutter straps, gutter brackets, expansion joints, and expansion-joint covers fabricated from same metal as gutters.

1. Fabricate from the following exposed metal:

a. Formed Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.

2. Gutter Profile: Square Profile according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." - Refer to drawings for locations.

3. Corners: Factory mitered and continuously welded or mechanically clinched and sealed watertight.

4. Gutter Supports: Gutter brackets with finish matching the gutters. 5. Gutter Accessories: Continuous snap-in plastic leaf guard and Flat ends.

Page 15: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Addition to Elwell Hall, Bloomsburg University of PA Roof Specialties Project #401-BL-954 07 71 00

6 of 9

B. Downspouts: Plain rectangular complete with machine-crimped elbows, manufactured from the following exposed metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.

1. Formed Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.

C. Aluminum Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.8 REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS

A. Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, from the following exposed metal:

1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft.. 2. Formed Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick. 3. Stainless Steel: 0.025 inch thick. 4. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight. 5. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide reglets with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with

neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge.

6. Stucco Type, Embedded: Provide reglets with upturned fastening flange and extension leg of length to match thickness of applied finish materials.

7. Concrete Type, Embedded: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of concrete materials, special fasteners for attaching reglet to concrete forms, and guides to ensure alignment of reglet section ends.

8. Masonry Type, Embedded: Provide reglets with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint.

B. Counterflashings: Manufactured units of heights to overlap top edges of base flashings by 4 inches and in lengths not exceeding 12 feet designed to snap into reglets or through-wall-flashing receiver and compress against base flashings with joints lapped, from the following exposed metal:

1. Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft.. 2. Formed Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. 3. Stainless Steel: 0.025 inch thick.

C. Accessories:

1. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where reglet is provided separate from metal counterflashing.

2. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.

D. Copper Finish: Non-patinated, mill.

E. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodic.

F. Stainless-Steel Finish: No. 4 (bright, polished directional satin).

2.9 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

Page 16: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Addition to Elwell Hall, Bloomsburg University of PA Roof Specialties Project #401-BL-954 07 71 00

7 of 9

B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties.

C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water. Overlap edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

B. Slip Sheet: Install with tape or adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under roof specialties. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.

1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant. 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes

and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. 4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted. 5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel roof specialties with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

Page 17: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Addition to Elwell Hall, Bloomsburg University of PA Roof Specialties Project #401-BL-954 07 71 00

8 of 9

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of self-adhering, high-temperature sheet underlayment.

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof specialties for waterproof performance.

C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.

1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of corners or intersections unless otherwise shown on Drawings.

2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F.

3.4 COPING INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor copings to meet performance requirements.

1. Interlock face and back leg drip edges of snap-on coping cap into cleated anchor plates anchored to substrate at 40-inch centers.

3.5 ROOF-EDGE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, cants, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners.

B. Anchor roof edgings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing to meet performance requirements.

3.6 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-edge drainage system.

B. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Allow for thermal expansion. Attach gutters to firmly anchored gutter supports spaced not more than 24 inches apart. Attach ends with rivets and seal with sealant to make watertight. Slope to downspouts.

1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet apart. Install expansion joint caps.

2. Install continuous leaf guards on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, removable for cleaning gutters.

Page 18: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Addition to Elwell Hall, Bloomsburg University of PA Roof Specialties Project #401-BL-954 07 71 00

9 of 9

C. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.

1. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system as indicated on drawings.

3.7 REGLET AND COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Coordinate installation of reglets and counterflashings with installation of base flashings.

B. Embedded Reglets: See Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installation of reglets.

C. Surface-Mounted Reglets: Install reglets to receive flashings where flashing without embedded reglets is indicated on Drawings. Install at height so that inserted counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings.

D. Counterflashings: Insert counterflashings into reglets or other indicated receivers; ensure that counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with elastomeric sealant. Fit counterflashings tightly to base flashings.

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition during construction.

D. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION

Page 19: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084113 - 1

SECTION 084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work included:

1. Work under this section includes the design of the aluminum entrance and window systems and all materials, labor and equipment for the complete installation of the work as shown on the drawings and specified herein. Work includes:

a. Aluminum entrance doors. b. Aluminum entrance framing system for entrances and vestibule, including

sidelight and transom frames as indicated. c. Aluminum storefront system. d. Glass and glazing of the systems. e. Hardware. f. Anchors, fasteners, flashings, trim and accessories to complete the work. g. Sealants required within entrance and window construction. h. All gaskets, sealants and tapes required in final assembly of the work. i. Installation of lock cylinders furnished under Section 08 71 00.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 079200 “Joint Sealants”. 2. Section 088100 “Glazing”. 3. Section 087110 “Hardware”. 4. Section 084413 “Glazed Aluminum Curtainwalls”.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide aluminum doors and framing system manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of this type of work.

B. Entrance Hardware: Comply with Ohio Building Code requirements.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels, AAMA 2605.

Page 20: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084113 - 2

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01 33 23:

1. Framing system details. 2. Door details. 3. Window details. 4. Installation instructions. 5. Itemized schedule of door hardware. 6. Finish samples.

B. Tests: Submit two copies of test reports made or witnessed by an independent testing laboratory showing the results of tests conducted on previously manufactured windows of the type used on this project. The reports shall verify conformance to thermal movement, air and water infiltration and structural properties as described herein.

C. Building Shop Drawings: Include complete evaluations of all systems; details and methods of anchorage; details of construction finishes; methods of assembly; location and installation of hardware and reinforcement for same; size, shape and thickness of materials; joints and connections; details of joining with other work.

1. Scale: Include typical unit elevation of each system at 1/2" scale and details at full scale where practical.

D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for materials and fabrication of work, and instructions and recommendations for installation and maintenance. Include certified test reports showing compliance with requirements where a test method is indicated.

E. Samples: Submit samples of each type and color and finish required by this Section, on 12" sections of extrusions or formed shapes and on 6" squares of sheet/plate. Include two or more samples in each set.

1. Architect reserves right to require fabrication samples showing prime members, joinery, anchorage, expansion provisions, glazing and similar details, profiles and intersections.

2. Samples: Submit finish samples showing the light and dark range limits of the anodizing color. These finish samples will be used in the field as a check for items specified in this Section. Anodized items whose color does not fall within the range indicated by these samples are unacceptable and shall not be used in the finished work

F. Special Environmental Requirements’: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 81 13):

1. Recycled Content:

a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product.

b. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar value of product included in project.

c. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of recycled content product in the assembly by weight.

d. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar value of assembly.

2. Local/Regional Materials:

Page 21: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084113 - 3

a. Sourcing location(s): Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and recovery; indicate distance between extraction, harvesting, and recovery and the project site.

b. Manufacturing location(s): Indicate location of manufacturing facility; indicate distance between manufacturing facility and the project site.

c. Product Value: Indicate dollar value of product containing local/regional materials; include materials cost only.

d. Product Component(s) Value: Where product components are sourced or manufactured in separate locations, provide location information for each component. Indicate the percentage by weight of each component per unit of product.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Pack, deliver, handle, store and protect materials from damage in accordance with AAMA Curtain Wall #10, "Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum" recommendations.

1. Remove paper type wrappings when unloading. 2. Store materials inside the buildings whenever possible in clean, dry ventilated areas free

of dust or corrosive fumes. 3. Stack members vertically or on edge, shim between components to provide water

drainage and ventilation. Protect with adequate coverings, placed to provide adequate air circulation.

4. During installation, protect materials from lime mortar, run-off from concrete and copper, weld splatter, acids, roofing materials, solvents and abrasive cleaner.

1.7 WARRANTIES

A. Submit written warranty signed by manufacturer, Contractor, and installer agreeing to repair or replace work which fails in materials or workmanship within three years of the date of project acceptance.

1. Failure of materials or workmanship shall include excessive leakage or air infiltration, excessive deflections and defects in accessories, weather seals and other components of work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Drawings and specifications are based on products by KAWNEER CO.

B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Equal products by the following manufacturers are acceptable providing they meet or exceed the requirements specified herein and conform to the design intent indicated on the drawings:

1. VISTAWALL 2. EFCO 3. TUBELITE DIVISION, INDAL, INC. 4. WAUSAU 5. YKK AMERICA

Page 22: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084113 - 4

2.2 STOREFRONT, WINDOW FRAMING AND ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Type: An integrated system of extruded aluminum sections, glazing devices, sealing devices, doors and hardware and operable windows.

B. Materials: Provide aluminum alloy and temper for each shape as recommended by manufacturer and processor to comply with requirements of performance, fabrication, and application of finish.

1. Thickness: As required to meet design requirements with a minimum of 1/8" for major sections.

2. Minimum 25% recycled content. 3. Material and products to be manufactured regionally AND harvested, extracted, or

recovered regionally within a radius of 500 miles from the project site.

C. Framing: KAWNEER 451T, framing for 1" insulating glass.

1. Type: Thermally broken, outside glazed, fixed type framing as indicated on drawings. 2. Frame

a. Members: Main frame members designated specifically for manufacture of aluminum windows extruded from 6063-T5 aluminum alloy.

b. Glazing: Extruded snap-in type bead. Units to accept 1" insulating glass. c. Trim: Provide all trim, sills, flashings and closures to complete installation. d. Size

1) Sightline: Nominal 2". 2) Depth: 4-1/2”.

e. Provide subframing as required for power operated entrance door application. See Section 08 42 29.

3. Special Framing Shapes: Provide as detailed or as required to maintain design intent as indicated on building elevations drawings and section drawings. Aluminum extruded shapes and bent aluminum sheet, minimum 0.063", finished after fabrication.

4. Vestibule Framing: KAWNEER Trifab II 451. Units to accept 1/4" glass. 5. Deflection: Allow for ½” deflection, positive and negative at all applicable connection and

joint locations including but not limited to floors and heads.

D. Performance Requirements: Exterior window wall system (excluding doors) shall meet or exceed the following performance requirements.

1. Wind loads: Provide storefront system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures indicated on the drawings.

2. Thermal Movement: Window framing system shall be designed to provide for expansion and contraction of component materials caused by a surface temperature range of 180o F., without causing buckling, stresses on glass, failure of joint seals, undue stress on structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction of performance, or other detrimental effects.

3. Air Infiltration: Air leakage shall not exceed 0.06 cfm per square foot of fixed wall area when tested in accordance; with ASTM E283 at test pressure not less than 6.24 psf.

4. Water Infiltration

a. Provide drainage to exterior face of framing any water entering at joints. b. No uncontrolled water penetration shall occur when tested in accordance with ASTM

E331, at test pressure not less than 8.0 psf.

Page 23: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084113 - 5

5. Structural Properties - Uniform Load: A static air design load of 20 psf shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member. At a structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.2% of their clear spans shall occur.

6. Thermal Properties

a. Thermal transmittance due to conduction (Uc) shall not be greater than 0.58 BTU/hr/ft sq./degree F when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503.1.

b. Condensation Resistance Factor Frame (CRF): Shall not be less than 61 when tested in accordance with AAMA 1502.7.

E. Glazed Aluminum Entrance Doors: Medium stile, manufacturer's standard, single acting aluminum entrances.

1. Stiles: Nominal 3-1/2" wide. 2. Rails

a. Top: 3-1/2" high. b. Bottom: 6-1/2" high.

3. Section Wall Thickness: .125" for major components; 0.05" for glazing moldings. 4. Door Thickness: 1-3/4". 5. Corners: Stiles through design, joined by concealed bolts and weld. 6. Provide complete with snap-in glazing stops and gaskets. 7. Sizes: As indicated. Provide single or pairs of doors as scheduled. 8. Exterior Entrance Weatherstripping: KAWNEER "Sealair Weathering" system or equal by

other approved manufacturer. Locate weatherstripping at jambs, head and meeting stiles (as applicable). Provide bottom rail with EPDM blade gasket sweep. Size sweep to close against door threshold. Sweep housing finish to match door finish.

9. Glazing: 1/4", in vestibule, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 FINISHES

A. All exposed aluminum surfaces shall receive an Architectural Class 1, champagne anodized coating; AA-M12C22A44, minimum 0.7 mil thickness.

2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. Prepare and reinforce doors and frames for hardware. Factory fit and install hardware in accordance with Section 08 71 00 and manufacturer's requirements.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum components. Finish exposed fasteners to match aluminum work.

B. Flashing, Trim and Accessories: Provide as required to complete the work. Finish shall match aluminum entrances and storefront finishes. Work includes:

1. Aluminum closure panels, flashing and trim.

Page 24: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084113 - 6

2. Sill flashing: .040” 3004 alloy aluminum sheet with matching factory applied finish. 3. Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft stainless steel, 26 gauge minimum, type selected by

manufacturer for compatibility. 4. All trim materials shall be finished after fabrication, unfinished exposed edges at holes

and trim terminations are not acceptable.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's high strength aluminum units where feasible; otherwise, nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A123. Reinforce doors to receive hardware.

D. Bituminous Coatings: Cold applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC PS 12, compounded for 30 mil thickness per coat.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Provide manufacturer's standard fabrication and accessories that comply with indicated requirements. Minor dimension differences will be accepted in order to utilize manufacturer's standard products.

B. Fit and assemble the work at the shop to the greatest extent possible. Disassemble only as required for shipment and erection. Maintain true continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles. Provide secure attachment and support at mechanical joints, with hairline fit of contacting members. Conceal fasteners wherever possible.

C. Reinforce aluminum work as necessary at points of support or anchorage and at mechanical joints and points of attachment to meet performance requirements and for support of the system. Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or preformed separators that will prevent corrosion. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints with plastic inserts or other non-abrasive concealed inserts.

D. Coordinate work of this section with other work for proper sequence of construction without delays. Verify dimensions of supporting structure and other elements that precede wall system work before fabrication of required components. Provide for erection tolerances for other work where field measurements cannot be obtained.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine substrates supporting structure, and installation conditions. Do not proceed with aluminum entrances erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for satisfactory performance.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Do not install component parts that are observed to be defective, including warped, bowed, dented, abraded and broken members.

Page 25: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084113 - 7

2. Remove and replace members that have been damaged during installation or thereafter before time of acceptance.

3. Do not cut or trim component parts during erection, in a manner which would damage finish, decrease strength or result in a visual imperfection or a failure in performance of the work.

B. Install components in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.

C. Install component parts level, plumb, true to line and with uniform joints and reveals. Secure to structure with non-staining and non-corrosive shims, anchors, fasteners, spacers and fillers.

D. Assembly and Anchorage: Anchor component parts securely in place, by bolting or other permanent mechanical attachment system, which will comply with performance requirements and permits movements as required.

E. Apply a bituminous coating or other suitable separator on concealed contact surfaces of dissimilar materials, before assembly or installation to prevent corrosive or electrolytic action.

F. Set sill members and entrance thresholds in a bed of sealant compound, or with joint fillers or gaskets to provide weathertight requirements.

G. Install glass and glazing, in accordance with Section 08 81 00 and the manufacturer's requirements.

H. Install joint sealants specified in Section 07 92 00, in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

I. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, without binding, and to provide tight proper fit at contact points and weatherstripping.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by attachment of streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markings of any type to surfaces of glass.

B. Remove protective coating when completion of construction activities no longer require its retention.

C. Immediately before acceptance of the work, clean the aluminum entrance systems thoroughly, inside and out. Demonstrate proper cleaning methods to Owner's maintenance personnel during final cleaning. Prepare a "Cleaning and Maintenance Manual" listing types of cleaning compounds, cleaning methods, sealants and glazing materials used for cleaning, repair and maintenance of work and turn over to Owner upon acceptance of the work.

END OF SECTION 084113

Page 26: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

 

Page 27: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Interior Aluminum Storefronts The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084314 - 1

SECTION 084314 INTERIOR ALUMINUM STOREFRONT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included:

1. Provide aluminum storefront systems as shown and specified. Work includes:

a. Aluminum framing. b. Glass and glazing of the systems. c. Anchors, fasteners, flashings, trim and accessories to complete the work. d. Sealants required within storefront construction. e. All gaskets, sealants and tapes required in final assembly of the work. f. Aluminum doors.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 018113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”. 2. Section 079200 “Joint Sealants”. 3. Section 084113 “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts”. 4. Section 084413 “Glazed Aluminum Curtainwall”. 5. Section 088100 “Glass and Glazing”. 6. Section 087110 “Door Hardware”.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association (AAMA)

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

C. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels, AAMA 2605.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide interior aluminum storefront systems manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of this type of work.

B. Painted Finishes: Factory painted finish to be performed by an applicator specifically approved by the paint manufacturer. The applicator shall provide written notification of approval by paint manufacturer prior to application of the finish.

Page 28: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Interior Aluminum Storefronts The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084314 - 2

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01 33 23:

1. Framing system details. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Finish samples showing the light and dark range limits of the anodizing colors. These

finish samples will be used in the field as a check for items specified in this section. Anodized items whose color does not fall within the range indicated by these samples are unacceptable and shall not be used in the finished work.

B. Special Environmental Requirements’: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 81 13):

1. Recycled Content

a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product.

b. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar value of product included in project.

c. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of recycled content product in the assembly by weight.

d. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar value of assembly.

2. Local/Regional Materials

a. Sourcing location(s): Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and recovery; indicate distance between extraction, harvesting, and recovery and the project site.

b. Manufacturing location(s): Indicate location of manufacturing facility; indicate distance between manufacturing facility and the project site.

c. Product Value: Indicate dollar value of product containing local/regional materials; include materials cost only.

d. Product Component(s) Value: Where product components are sourced or manufactured in separate locations, provide location information for each component. Indicate the percentage by weight of each component per unit of product.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Pack, deliver, handle, store and protect materials from damage in accordance with AAMA Curtain Wall #10, "Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum" recommendations.

1. Remove paper type wrappings when unloading. 2. Store materials inside the buildings in clean, dry ventilated areas free of dust or corrosive

fumes. 3. Stack members vertically or on edge, shim between components to provide water

drainage and ventilation. Protect with adequate coverings, placed to provide adequate air circulation.

4. During installation, protect materials from lime mortar, run-off from concrete and copper, weld splatter, acids, roofing materials, solvents and abrasive cleaner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Page 29: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Interior Aluminum Storefronts The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084314 - 3

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extrude Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.

B. Minimum 25% recycled content.

C. Material and products to be manufactured regionally AND harvested, extracted, or recovered regionally within a radius of 500 miles from the project site.

2.2 STOREFRONT SYSTEM

A. Type: An integrated system of extruded aluminum sections, glazing devices, sealing devices.

B. Framing: "Trifab VG 450 S.S.G." and “Trifab VG 450” by KAWNEER, 1-3/4" x 4- 1/2” members. Equal products by VISTAWALL; EFCO, YKK AMERICA or TUBELITE are acceptable provided they comply with requirements stated herein.

1. Provide complete with snap-in glazing stops and gaskets for the thicknesses of glass units indicated or specified. Provide rectangular glazing stops; triangular or beveled not permitted.

2. Provide silicone glazed system framing members where indicated.

C. Provide door frame extrusions as required to fit in storefront framing system or as individual framed opening as scheduled.

2.3 DOORS

A. Glazed Aluminum Entrance Doors: Medium stile, manufacturer's standard, single acting aluminum entrances.

1. Stiles: Nominal 3-1/2" wide. 2. Rails

a. Top: 3-1/2" high. b. Bottom: 6-1/2" high.

3. Section Wall Thickness: .125" for major components; 0.05" for glazing moldings. 4. Door Thickness: 1-3/4". 5. Corners: Stiles through design, joined by concealed bolts and weld. 6. Provide complete with snap-in glazing stops and gaskets. 7. Sizes: As indicated. Provide single or pairs of doors as scheduled. 8. Glazing: 1/4" tempered

2.4 FINISHES

A. All exposed aluminum surfaces shall receive an Architectural Class 1, champagne anodized coating; AA-M12C22A44, minimum 0.7 mil thickness.

Page 30: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Interior Aluminum Storefronts The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084314 - 4

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum components. Finish exposed fasteners to match aluminum work.

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's high strength aluminum units where feasible; otherwise, nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A123.

C. Bituminous Coatings: Cold applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC PS 12, compounded for 30 mil thickness per coat.

D. Clear Protective Coatings: Provide aluminum surfaces covered with strippable surfacing designed specifically for protection of aluminum finish.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Aluminum Storefronts: Provide manufacturer's standard fabrication and accessories which comply with indicated requirements. Minor dimension differences will be accepted in order to utilize manufacturer's standard products.

B. Shop fabricates aluminum storefront systems. Fit and assemble the work at the shop to the greatest extent possible. Disassemble only as required for shipment and erection. Maintain true continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles. Provide secure attachment and support at mechanical joints, with hairline fit of contacting members. Conceal fasteners wherever possible.

C. Reinforce aluminum work as necessary at points of support or anchorage and at mechanical joints and points of attachment to meet performance requirements and for support of the system. Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or preformed separators which will prevent corrosion. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints with plastic inserts or other non-abrasive concealed inserts.

D. Coordinate aluminum storefront systems work with other work for proper sequence of construction without delays. Verify dimensions of supporting structure and other elements which precede wall system work before fabrication of required components. Provide for erection tolerances for other work where field measurements cannot be obtained.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine substrates supporting structure, and installation conditions. Do not proceed with aluminum storefront erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for satisfactory performance.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

Page 31: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Interior Aluminum Storefronts The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084314 - 5

1. Do not install component parts which are observed to be defective, including warped, bowed, dented, abraded and broken members. Remove and replace members which have been damaged during installation or thereafter before time of acceptance.

2. Do not cut or trim component parts during erection, in a manner which would damage finish, decrease strength or result in a visual imperfection or a failure in performance of the work.

B. Install the aluminum storefront systems in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.

C. Install component parts level, plumb, true to line and with uniform joints and reveals. Secure to structure with non-staining and non-corrosive shims, anchors, fasteners, spacers and fillers.

D. Assembly and Anchorage: Anchor component parts securely in place, by bolting or other permanent mechanical attachment system, which will comply with performance requirements and permits movements as required.

E. Apply a bituminous coating or other suitable separator on concealed contact surfaces of dissimilar materials, before assembly or installation to prevent corrosive or electrolytic action.

F. Install aluminum storefront system glass and glazing, in accordance with Section 08 81 00 and the manufacturer's requirements.

G. Install joint sealants within the aluminum storefront systems work with elastomeric joint sealants specified in Section 07 92 00, in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by attachment of streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markings of any type to surfaces of glass.

B. Remove protective coating when completion of construction activities no longer require its retention.

C. Immediately before acceptance of the work, clean the aluminum storefront systems thoroughly. Demonstrate proper cleaning methods to Owner's maintenance personnel during final cleaning. Prepare a "Cleaning and Maintenance Manual" listing types of cleaning compounds, cleaning methods, sealants and glazing materials used for cleaning, repair and maintenance of work and turn over to Owner upon acceptance of the work.

D. Prepare a "Cleaning and Maintenance Manual" listing types of cleaning compounds, cleaning methods, sealants and glazing materials used for cleaning, repair and maintenance of work and turn over to Owner upon acceptance of the work.

END OF SECTION 084314

Page 32: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

 

Page 33: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084413 - 1

SECTION 084413 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included:

1. Work under this section includes the design of the curtain wall system and all materials, labor and equipment for the complete installation of the aluminum curtain wall system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. Work includes:

a. Aluminum curtain wall framing. b. Glass and glazing of the aluminum curtain wall system and entrance doors. c. Anchors, fasteners, flashings, trim and accessories to complete the work. d. Sun shades; horizontal and vertical. e. Aluminum faced/insulated glazing panels. f. Aluminum windows. g. Power vent operators integrated with building management system.

2. Provide reinforcing within curtain wall framing as required to meet design loads and span conditions.

3. Coordination and scheduling of field performance tests.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 018113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”. 2. Section 079200 “Joint Sealants”. 3. Section 088100 “Glass and Glazing”. 4. Section 084113 “Aluminum Entrance Doors”.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide standard aluminum curtain wall framing system and aluminum doors manufactured by firms specializing in the production of this type of work.

B. Coordination: Coordinate entrance doors, frames and subframes that are indicated to operate within curtain wall system. Include:

1. Aluminum finishes systems. Colors selected must be an exact color match to aluminum entrance system finish, as determined by the Architect, from the same paint system manufacturer.

2. Door hardware.

C. Field Testing Laboratory: Provide testing lab services in accordance with Section 01 45 29.

Page 34: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084413 - 2

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Vertical Panel Joint Coordination: Provide coordination drawings and installation techniques to accomplish panel joint and curtainwall mullion centerline alignment. See drawings. Ensure all mullions are consistently placed as indicated.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels, AAMA 2605.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01 33 23:

1. Framing system details. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Finish samples.

B. Tests: Submit two copies of test reports made or witnessed by an independent testing laboratory showing the results of tests conducted on previously manufactured windows of the type used on this project. The reports shall verify conformance to thermal movement, air and water infiltration and structural properties as described herein.

C. Building Shop Drawings: Include complete evaluations of all systems including window power operators; details and methods of anchorage; details of construction finishes; methods of assembly; location and installation of hardware and reinforcement for same; size, shape and thickness of materials; joints and connections; details of joining with other work.

1. Scale: Include typical unit elevation of each system at 1/2" scale and details at full scale where practical.

2. Calculations: Show section moduli of load-bearing members, and calculations of stresses and deflections for performance under design loading. Such calculations shall be done by a structural engineer licensed to practice in the State of Pennsylvania. Calculation submission must coincide with shop drawing submission.

3. Motor Operated Windows: Include wiring diagrams, control layouts and electrical requirements.

D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for materials and fabrication of work, and instructions/recommendations for installation and maintenance. Include certified test reports showing compliance with requirements where a test is indicated.

E. Samples: Submit samples of each type and color and finish required by this Section, on 12" sections of extrusions or formed shapes and on 6" squares of sheet/plate. Include two or more samples in each set.

1. Architect reserves right to require fabrication samples showing prime members, joinery, anchorage, expansion provisions, glazing and similar details, profiles and intersections.

Page 35: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084413 - 3

2. Samples: Submit finish samples showing the light and dark range limits of the anodizing color. These finish samples will be used in the field as a check for items specified in this Section. Anodized items whose color does not fall within the range indicated by these samples are unacceptable and shall not be used in the finished work

F. Special Environmental Requirements’: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 81 13:

1. Recycled Content:

a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product.

b. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar value of product included in project.

c. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of recycled content product in the assembly by weight.

d. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar value of assembly.

2. Local/Regional Materials:

a. Sourcing location(s): Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and recovery; indicate distance between extraction, harvesting, and recovery and the project site.

b. Manufacturing location(s): Indicate location of manufacturing facility; indicate distance between manufacturing facility and the project site.

c. Product Value: Indicate dollar value of product containing local/regional materials; include materials cost only.

d. Product Component(s) Value: Where product components are sourced or manufactured in separate locations, provide location information for each component. Indicate the percentage by weight of each component per unit of product.

G. Field Performance Tests: Submit copies of field performance test reports specified in Article 3.03 herein. See Section 01 45 29.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Pack, deliver, handle, store and protect materials from damage in accordance with AAMA Curtain Wall #10, "Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum" recommendations.

1. Remove paper type wrappings when unloading. 2. Store materials inside the buildings whenever possible in clean, dry, ventilated

areas, free of dust or corrosive fumes. 3. Stack members vertically or on edge, shim between components to provide water

drainage and ventilation. Protect with adequate coverings, placed to provide adequate air circulation.

4. During installation, protect materials from lime mortar, run-off from concrete and copper, weld splatter, acids, roofing materials, solvents and abrasive cleaner.

1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS – CURTAINWALL

A. Performance Requirements: Exterior curtain wall system shall have been tested to meet or exceed the following performance requirements.

Page 36: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084413 - 4

1. Wind loads: Provide curtain wall system; include anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures indicated on the drawings.

2. Air Infiltration: Air leakage shall not exceed 0.06 cfm per square foot of fixed wall area when tested in accordance; with ASTM E283 at test pressure not less than 6.24 psi.

3. Water Infiltration

a. Provide drainage to exterior face of framing any water entering at joints and any condensation occurring within window construction.

b. Static Pressure: No uncontrolled water penetration when subjected to water spray at the rate of five gallons per hour per square foot at a static pressure of 10 psf for 15 minutes when tested in accordance with ASTM E331.

c. Dynamic Pressure: No uncontrolled water penetration when subjected to water spray at the rate of five gallons per hour per square foot with wind from a 2,000 horsepower aircraft engine wind generator at a pressure of 10 psf at 15 minutes; tested in accordance with AAMA TM-1 and AAMA 501.1.

4. Structural Properties: No damage or failure shall occur when tested in accordance with ASTM E330. Standard test design loading shall be up to 20 psf, positive and negative windload. A design deflection criteria of L/175 or 3/4" maximum shall apply to both positive and negative loads. At structural test load equal to 1.5 times the specified design load, no glass breakage or permanent set in the framing members in excess of 0.2% of their clear spans shall occur.

5. Condensation Resistance: When tested in accordance with AAMA 1502.7, the average condensation resistance factor (CRF) for the system shall be a minimum of 68 for curtain wall.

1.8 WARRANTIES

A. Furnish written guarantee certifying that all work furnished and installed will be free of defects in materials and workmanship, and remain watertight for a period of three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Should any defect develop during the guaranty period due to faulty materials or improper workmanship, such defects will be repaired or replaced with new work at no expense to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.

B. Minimum 25% recycled content.

C. Material and products to be manufactured regionally AND harvested, extracted, or recovered regionally within a radius of 500 miles from the project site.

Page 37: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084413 - 5

2.2 CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM

A. Aluminum Framing Members: Alloys best suited to meet the performance requirements and structural characteristics as published by the Aluminum Association. Other alloys will be considered only if published literature is available by the primary producer of the material. Provide thicknesses, shapes and profiles as required to comply with performance requirements.

1. Shapes: extruded horizontal and tubular vertical framing sections; anchor mullions at framing structure as indicated.

2. Special (Custom) Framing Shapes: Provide as detailed or as required to maintain design intent as indicated on building elevations drawings and section drawings. Aluminum extruded shapes and bent aluminum sheet, minimum 0.063", finished after fabrication.

a. Materials: Provide aluminum alloy and temper for each shape as recommended by manufacturer and processor to comply with requirements of performance.

b. Design, Size and Profiles: Design and fabricate shade devices to dimensions indicated and profiles indicated. Provide gages and sizes of materials as required for span and load conditions.

B. Size: 2-1/2" wide x depth required for design loads.

C. Design system for exterior glazing of vision lites.

D. Expansion and Contraction: Design system for expansion and contraction of components without detrimental effects as may be caused by an ambient temperature range of 0 to 129 degrees.

E. Deflection: Allow for ½” deflection, positive and negative at all applicable connection and joint locations including but not limited to floors and heads.

F. Anchorage: Provide anchorage to building structure for three directional adjustments for fabrication and construction tolerances.

G. Trim and Closures: Visible aluminum trim and closures that are not extruded, shall be fabricated from .125" thick aluminum plate finished to match other aluminum curtain wall materials, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. Provide concealed fasteners wherever possible.

H. Manufacturer

1. Basis of Design: Drawings and Specifications are based on 1600 Series manufactured by KAWNEER.

2. Other Manufacturers: Systems manufactured by the following are acceptable providing they meet the performance and dimensional requirements that are specified herein and are indicated on the drawings.

a. VISTAWALL b. EFCO c. TUBELITE DIVISION, INDAL, INC.

2.3 ALUMINUM DOORS AND SUBFRAMES

A. Type: An integrated system of extruded aluminum subframe sections, sealing devices, and doors and hardware.

Page 38: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084413 - 6

1. Provide subframe and doors compatible with aluminum curtain wall system. 2. See Section 08 41 13.

B. Framing: Provide supplemental framing required for use in curtain wall framing.

2.4 WINDOW FRAMING SYSTEMS (ALTERNATE)

A. Type: An integrated system of extruded aluminum sections, frame adapter, glazing devices, sealing devices for a visually frameless operable window.

B. Materials: Provide aluminum alloy and temper for each shape as recommended by manufacturer and processor to comply with requirements of performance, fabrication, and application of finish.

1. Thickness: As required to meet design requirements with a minimum of 1/8" for major sections.

2. Type: Projecting 3. Performance Class/Grade: AW90 4. Hinges: Stainless steel 4 bar 5. Weather-stripping: Resilient elastomer 6. Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel 7. Finish: Match curtain-wall framing

C. Manufacturer

1. Basis of Design: Drawings and Specifications are based on Glassvent 1600 1” Structural Silicone Series manufactured by KAWNEER.

2. Other Manufacturers: Systems manufactured by the following are acceptable providing they meet the performance and dimensional requirements that are specified herein and are indicated on the drawings.

a. VISTAWALL b. EFCO c. TUBELITE DIVISION, INDAL, INC.

2.5 POWER VENT OPERATORS

A. Type: Low profile, motorized chain system connecting to window sash. Provide all brackets, attachment devices and wiring/cable through curtain-wall framing to controllers. Coordinate operation with building management system. See Section 23 09 00.

1. Operation: Open several windows as indicated simultaneously by wiring motors in parallel.

2. Opening: 12” maximum adjustable chain stroke 3. Dimension: Size operator force based on window size and weight. 4. Electrical: UL listed, CE certified, 24 V DC. 5. Chain. Double link stainless steel electronically self-adjusts for proper

closing. 6. Speed: .035” per second 7. Cycles: 10,000 tested 8. Warranty: 2 years. 9. Basis of Design Manufacturers: Operators manufactured by

BRONZECRAFT and the following companies are acceptable providing they meet

Page 39: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084413 - 7

the requirements specified herein and are an acceptable match as determined by the Architect.

a. SOMFY b. FUNCTIONAL FENESTRATIONS

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: 300 Series stainless steel. Finish exposed fasteners to match aluminum work.

B. Trim: Provide all matching trim (interior and exterior), flashings and closures to complete installation.

1. Sill flashing: .040” 3004 alloy aluminum sheet with matching factory applied finish. 2. Miscellaneous Flashing (not otherwise identified): .032” 3. Location: As indicated.

C. Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft stainless steel, 26 gauge minimum, type selected by manufacturer for compatibility.

D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's high strength aluminum units where feasible; otherwise, nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A386.

E. Sun Shade (horizontal with outraging) and Fins (vertical single blade): An aluminum sunshade device (consisting of custom outriggers, fascia, louvers, and attachment devices) that is anchored directly to the vertical curtain wall mullions.

1. Design, Size and Profiles: Design and fabricate sunshades to outside dimensions indicated. Provide gages and sizes of materials as required for span and load conditions.

a. 45 PSF ground snow load b. 25 PSF wind load c. Mullion spacing: as indicated d. Blade angle(s): coordinate with Architect e. Sizes: 12” vertical fin and 36” horizontal outrigger f. Profile: Airfoil g. Materials: Provide aluminum alloy and temper for each shape as recommended by

manufacturer and processor to comply with requirements of performance. h. Manufacturer Basis of Design: Drawings and Specifications are based on Versoveil

manufactured by KAWNEER. i. Other Manufacturers: Systems manufactured by the following are acceptable providing

they meet the performance and dimensional requirements that are specified herein and are indicated on the drawings. 1) VISTAWALL 2) EFCO 3) TUBELITE DIVISION, INDAL, INC.

2. Finish: Match curtain-wall framing.

F. Bituminous Coatings: Cold applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC PS 12, compounded for 30 mil thickness per coat.

Page 40: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084413 - 8

G. Slip Joint Linings: Provide plastic sheets, spacers or bearing pads to ensure free movement between surfaces where expansion and deflection movements are intended. Provide units of sizes and thicknesses as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Allow for ½” deflection, positive and negative at all applicable joint locations.

H. Aluminum Faced Glazing Panels: Provide panels where indicated consisting of rigid extruded polystyrene or polyurethane insulation core (minimum 2.0 pcf) with laminated .032 aluminum facing sheets each side. Provide with fluoropolymer finish (70% Kynar) finish; color as selected by Architect to match painted curtainwall framing members.

I. Structural Sealant: Designed to carry gravity loads of glazing and capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure.

1. Structural Glazing Sealants: ASTM C 1184, chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for use in curtain-wall assembly indicated.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

2. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Comply with dimensions and profiles indicated on drawings.

B. Provide manufacturer's standard fabrication and accessories that comply with indicated requirements. Minor dimension differences will be accepted in order to utilize manufacturer's standard products.

C. Thermal Break Construction: Fabricate curtain wall framing with a concealed low conductance thermal barrier, located in a manner which eliminates direct metal-to- metal contact. Provide manufacturer's standard construction that has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and condensation, and has been tested to show adequate strength and security of glass retention.

1. Conform to the applicable Performance Requirements specified herein.

D. Shop fabricates aluminum curtain wall assemblies. Fit and assemble the work at the shop to the greatest extent possible. Disassemble only as required for shipment and erection. Maintain true continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles. Provide secure attachment and support at mechanical joints, with hairline fit of contacting members. Conceal fasteners wherever possible.

E. Reinforce aluminum work as necessary at points of support or anchorage and at mechanical joints and points of attachment to meet performance requirements and for support of the system. Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or preformed separators that will

Page 41: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084413 - 9

prevent corrosion. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints with plastic inserts or other non-abrasive concealed inserts.

F. Coordinate aluminum curtain wall work with other work for proper sequence of construction without delays. Verify dimensions of supporting structure and other elements that precede wall system work before fabrication of required components. Provide for erection tolerances for other work where field measurements cannot be obtained.

2.8 FINISHES

A. All exposed aluminum surfaces shall receive an Architectural Class 1, champagne anodized coating; AA-M12C22A44, minimum 0.7 mil thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine substrates supporting structure and installation conditions. Do not proceed with curtain wall system erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for satisfactory performance.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Do not install component parts that are observed to be defective, including warped, bowed, dented, abraded and broken members. Remove and replace members that have been damaged during installation or thereafter before time of acceptance.

2. Do not cut or trim component parts during erection, in a manner which would damage finish, decrease strength, or result in a visual imperfection or a failure in performance of the work.

B. Install the curtain wall system in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.

C. Install component parts level, plumb, true to line and with uniform joints and reveals. Secure to structure with non-staining and non-corrosive shims, anchors, fasteners, spacers and fillers.

D. Assembly and Anchorage: Anchor component parts securely in place, by bolting or other permanent mechanical attachment system, which will comply with performance requirements and permits movements as required.

E. Apply a bituminous coating or other suitable separator on concealed contact surfaces of dissimilar materials, before assembly or installation to prevent corrosive or electrolytic action.

F. Set sill members in a bed of sealant compound, or with joint fillers or gaskets to provide weathertight requirements.

Page 42: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 084413 - 10

G. Install curtain wall system glass and glazing, in accordance with Section 08 81 00 and the manufacturer's requirements.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. All tests must be performed in the presence of the Architect, Construction Manager and Owner’s Representative. Provide a minimum of 24 hours prior to each test being performed.

C. Water Spray Test: Perform tests in accordance with AAMA 501.2 and show no evidence of water penetration. Test areas are as follows:

1. Curtainwall Expanse: Two locations approximately 8’ wide by 25’ high as directed by Construction Manager. Perform tests on selected areas prior to installing remaining curtainwall expanse.

2. Punched Openings: Architect will select punched opening units to be tested and time of tests. If units fail to meet specified requirements, determine reasons for failure. 10% of windows will be tested. For each window that does not meet specified results, an additional window will be tested.

D. Structural-Sealant Adhesion: Test structural sealant according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401, Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destructive)," Appendix X2.

1. Test a minimum of two areas on each building facade. 2. Repair installation areas damaged by testing.

E. Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that the work does not comply with specified requirements.

F. Additional testing and inspecting, Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation. Attach streamers to framing. Do not apply markings or materials of any type to surfaces of glass.

B. Remove protective coating when completion of construction activities no longer require its retention.

C. Immediately before acceptance of the work, clean the aluminum curtain wall system thoroughly, inside and out. Demonstrate proper cleaning methods to Owner's maintenance personnel during final cleaning.

D. Prepare a "Cleaning and Maintenance Manual" listing types of cleaning compounds, cleaning methods, sealants and glazing materials used for cleaning, repair and maintenance of work and turn over to Owner upon acceptance of the work.

END OF SECTION 084413

Page 43: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Door Hardware The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 087110 - 1

SECTION 087110 DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hardware for wood, steel, and aluminum doors.

1. Furnish the General contractor with all items known commercially as finish or door hardware as required and specified herein.

2. These specifications are a guide and description of the types and quality of materials re-quired. Materials of quality and weight less than outlined by these specifications will not be ac-cepted.

3. If there are any omissions noted in any hardware set, call them to the attention of the Architect prior to the bid opening for instructions; otherwise, the list will be considered complete. No extras will be allowed for omissions, changes or corrections necessary to facilitate proper installation and operation of the hardware. Any additional items which may be required will be of the same type, quality and be consistent with the other hardware specified.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames” – Silencers integral with steel frames. 2. Section 081400 “Wood Doors”. 3. Section 084113 “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts”. 4. Section 281300 “Access Control”.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute:

1. ANSI A156.1 - Butts and Hinges (2006). 2. ANSI A156.26 - Continuous Hinges (2006). 3. ANSI A156.13 – Mortise Locks and Latches Series 1000 (2005). 4. ANSI A156.3 - Exit Devices (2008). 5. ANSI A156.4 - Door Controls–Closers (2008) . 6. ANSI A156.5 - Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products (2001). 7. ANSI A156.6 - Architectural Door Trim (2005). 8. ANSI A156.7 - Template Hinge Dimensions (2009). 9. ANSI A156.8 - Door Controls - Overhead Stops and Holders (2005). 10. ANSI A156.16 - Auxiliary Hardware (2008). 11. ANSI A156.21 – Thresholds (2009). 12. ANSI A156.22 – Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems (2005).

Page 44: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Door Hardware The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 087110 - 2

13. ANSI A156.18 - Materials and Finishes (2006).

B. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association:

1. BHMA Directory of Certified Products.

C. National Fire Protection Association:

1. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors, Fire Windows. 2. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 3. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:

1. UL 10C - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 2. UL 305 - Panic Hardware. 3. UL - Building Materials Directory.

E. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed):

1. WH - Certification Listings.

F. All hardware shall meet rquirements of Federal, State and Local codes having jurisdiction. Any item not meeting these requirements shall be removed and replaced with proper item at no additional cost to the owner.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire Rated Openings: Provide door hardware listed by UL or Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed), or other testing laboratory approved by applicable authorities.

1. Hardware: Tested in accordance with NFPA 252.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.

B. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, wiring diagrams, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.

C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.

Page 45: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Door Hardware The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 087110 - 3

d. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule.

e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Keying information, indexed by door number, key set and hardware schedule

heading number. Schedule shall include all special keying notes and stamping instructions.

D. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Substitutions

1. Manufacturers and model numbers listed are to establish a standard of quality. Similar items by approved manufacturers that are equal in design, function, and quality will be accepted upon prior approval by the architect, and provided required data and physical samples are submitted at least ten working days prior to receipt of bids.

B. Supplier Qualifications

1. The supplier must be a corporate member in good standing of The Door and Hardware Institute (DHI), employing at least one Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) currently participating in DHI’s Continuing Education Program (CEP).

2. The supplier must be a factory authorized distributor of all materials proposed to be furnished on this project.

3. The supplier shall be available to make job site visits when requested by the Architect or Contractor within a reasonable amount of time.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Marking

1. The supplier shall mark all items of hardware with the door or item number as listed in the approved finish hardware schedule.

B. Delivery

1. The supplier shall deliver all hardware to the project in manufacturers original packages. Some items may have to be delivered to fabricators for factory installation. Upon delivery a representative of the hardware supplier shall jointly inventory hardware with the General Contractors installer until each is satisfied that the count is correct.

C. Storage

1. The General Contractor shall receive and store the finish hardware in a secure and dry area.

Page 46: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Door Hardware The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 087110 - 4

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Furnish the following Manufacturers Warranties:

1. All work in this Section shall be guaranteed to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of Substantial Completion of the project. In addition, provide special factory warranty for locks, closers and exit devices specific for this project. Warranty period will be 5 years for locks, 5 years for exit devices and 10 years for closers. Factory direct order number shall be provided for each shipment of locks, closers and exit devices with warranty, prior to final payment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include the following:

Item: Manufacturer: Approved Equal:

Hinges Stanley Hager, McKinney Continuous Hinges Select Stanley, Roton, ABH Mortise Locks Schlage Sargent, Best Cylinders Best No Substitution Exit Devices Von Duprin Precision (Stanley) Closers LCN Norton, Stanley Auxiliary Hardware Rockwood Hager, Ives Architectural Door Trim Rockwood Hager, Ives Door Controls Glynn Johnson (GJ) Rixson, ABH Thresholds, Gasketing National Guard Products Pemko, Zero (NGP)

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Single Source Responsibility

1. Furnish all major hardware items, lock sets, exit devices, and closers from the same manufacturer. Furnish all other items as much as possible from one manufacturer.

B. Fasteners:

1. Furnish fasteners as required for the proper installation of the finish hardware. 2. Install all finish hardware only with fasteners furnished by the manufacturers. 3. Warranties and Labels will be void on material installed with unauthorized fasteners.

C. Hinges:

1. Comply with ANSI A156.1. 2. Furnish template produced steel, brass, or bronze hinges of the types listed in the

hardware sets. Furnish non-removeable pins for all exterior outswing doors, non- rising pins at all other doors.

Page 47: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Door Hardware The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 087110 - 5

a. Furnish UL listed hinges for fire-rated doors. b. Unless otherwise noted in the hardware sets furnish the following sizes and

quantities.

1) Doors shall have a pin height of 4-1/2” for doors up to 36” in width, a pin height of 5” for doors up to 48” in width.

2) Hinge width shall be determined by the trim conditions affecting the throw. 3) Furnish two hinges per leaf for doors up to 60” in height, three hinges per

leaf for doors up to 90” in height, and one additional hinge for each 30” of additional height.

D. Continuous Hinges:

1. Comply with ANSI A156.26. 2. Gear-Type Hinges: Extruded-aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves; joined by a

continuous extruded-aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self-lubricating thrust bearings.

E. Heavy Duty Mortise locks:

1. Comply with ANSIA156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1. 2. Lock cases shall be manufactured of heavy gauge steel, corrosion protected, and closed

on all sides to protect internal parts. Locks shall have adjustable, beveled, and armored fronts, with standard 2-3/4” backset. Latches shall be ¾” throw, stainless steel, anti-friction type, with auxiliary deadlatches. On functions with deadbolts, the bolts shall be stainless steel with 1” throw.

a. Locks shall be UL listed for fire rated doors. b. Trim shall be cast levers with wrought escutcheons as listed. c. Levers shall meet ANSI A117.1 accessibility code and ADA requirements.

F. Exit Devices:

1. Comply with ANSI A156.4, Operational Grade 1. 2. Lever design shall match mortise lock lever design. 3. All devices shall incorporate a security dead-latching feature. 4. Provide roller strikes for all rim and surface mounted vertical rod devices, ASA strikes for

mortise devices, and manufacturers standard strikes for concealed vertical rod devices. 5. Exit Devices shall be UL listed panic exit hardware. All exit devices for fire rated openings

shall be UL labeled fire exit hardware. 6. Provide electrical options as scheduled. 7. All exit devices shall incorporate sound dampeners which reduces noise associated with

exit device operation.

G. Door Closers:

1. Comply with ANSI A156.4, Operational Grade 1. 2. Closers shall be full rack and pinion type with full molded covers, be non-handed, and

have separate valves to adjust closing speed, latching speed, and back check cushioning and positioning.

a. Provide mounting brackets or plates as required by opening conditions. b. Closers for fire rated doors shall be factory sized for opening conditions. c. Closers shall be UL listed for fire rated doors. d. Closers shall meet ANSI A117.1 accessibility codes and ADA requirements.

Page 48: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Door Hardware The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 087110 - 6

H. Overhead Stops and Holders:

1. Comply with ANSI A156.8. 2. Exterior and interior stops or holders shall have brass or stainless steel channels.

I. Flush Bolts

1. Comply with ANSI A156.16. 2. As codes and conditions require, furnish manual or automatic flush bolts as listed.

Provide all necessary strikes, shims, and guides to insure proper installation and operation. Provide dust proof strikes for the bottom bolts. Provide fasteners as required by the door and frame material.

a. Automatic flush bolts shall be UL rated for fire rated doors.

J. Push and Pull Plates:

1. Comply with ANSI A156.6. 2. All plates shall be .050” thick. Push plates shall have fasteners as required by door

materials. Pulls shall be thru-bolted to doors.

a. Push plates to be 8” x 16”. Where door stiles will not allow 8” plates, 4” plates may be used.

b. Pull plates to be 8” center to center on 16” plate.

K. Protection Plates:

1. Comply with ANSI A156.6. 2. Height shall be 10” or as listed in the hardware sets. 3. Provide stainless steel kickplates .050” thick, beveled three sides with countersunk

mounting holes to accept oval head screws.

L. Door Stops and Holders:

1. Provide floor stops for doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead stops.

M. Weatherstripping/Gasketing

1. Comply with ANSI A156.22. 2. Provide weatherstrip/gasketing as indicated on the drawings or in hardware sets.

N. Thresholds:

1. Comply with ANSI A156.21. 2. Provide thresholds as indicated on the drawings or in the hardware sets.

a. Threshold shall meet ANSI A117.1 Accessibility codes and ADA requirements. b. Thresholds shall be furnished and installed with ¼ -20 stainless steel machine

screws and lead anchors.

Page 49: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Door Hardware The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 087110 - 7

2.3 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. Keying Requirements:

1. The finish hardware supplier shall meet with the Architect and/or Owner to establish the final keying requirements for this project.

B. Allow for the Following:

1. All locks shall be construction keyed and grand master keyed to the existing Penn. State University Best master key system.

2. Furnish: 10 each Construction Masterkeys, 5 each Great Grand, Grand, and/or Masterkeys for each Masterkeyed Group. 3 each Change Keys per Cylinder. 5 each Control Keys. All keys shall be embossed with the letters “P.S.U.” and stamped “DO NOT DUPLICATE” and the door number or other symbol as directed.

3. Construction keys only will be issued to the contractor for use during construction. Permanent keys will be sent direct to the owner’s representative by Registered mail, return receipt requested.

C. Cylinders: Locking devices shall be equipped with Best Access Systems cylinders with removeable 7-pin tumbler cores. For security while the building is under construction, locks shall be equipped with temporary keyed brass construction cores furnished by Best and installed by the General Contractor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. The installer and contractor shall examine all doors, frames and related items for conditions that would prevent the proper installation of the finish hardware.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be by skilled workmen, who work with the proper tools and shall be in accord with the manufacturer’s instructions. Whenever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and re-installation or application of surface protection with finishing work. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate.

B. Hardware shall be installed accurately, applied securely, and adjusted properly.

C. The installer shall install the hardware only with fasteners furnished by the manufacturer. Hardware installed with unapproved fasteners will be rejected, fire labels and warranties will be void.

D. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant.

E. Mount hardware units at heights recommended by DHI “Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames”, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by the Architect.

Page 50: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Door Hardware The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 087110 - 8

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. After the hardware has been installed, the supplier shall check the project to determine the proper application of the hardware according to the approved hardware schedule and notify the architect of any hardware not in accordance. Where hardware is found to be installed incorrectly, the contractor shall repair, or replace as directed by the Architect.

B. “Post Installation Fire-Door Inspections: The hardware supplier is required to do a walk-thru inspection of every fire door opening on the project, and shall provide written documentation for the owner that ensures that all of the specified component parts of the fire-rated assembly have been properly installed and are functioning as designed.”

C. The hardware supplier shall instruct owner personnel in the proper adjustments and maintenance of hardware.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. The installer shall check and make final adjustments to each operating item of hardware on each door to ensure proper operation and function.

B. The installer shall adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of air handling equipment.

C. Clean all hardware with non-abrasive cleaners. All hardware shall be left clean and free of disfigurements.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall protect all items of hardware from damage until the owner accepts the project as complete.

3.6 HARDWARE SETS

Set #01 Opening: 027 4 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley

e 1 ea Privacy L9040 03N 626 Schlag1 ea Closer 4010 x ST 689 LCN1 ea Overhead Stop 104S 630 GJ 1 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 34 B3E 630 Rockwood1 ea Mop Plate K1050 4 x 35 B3E 630 Rockwood

 

Set #02 Openings: 002, M007, 126b 4 ea Hinge FBB179 5 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 1 ea Storeroom Lock L9080L 03N 626 Schlage1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best1 ea Floor Stop 443 630 Rockwood

 

Page 51: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Door Hardware The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 087110 - 9

Set #03 Opening: 005 4 ea Hinge FBB179 5 x 4-1/2 NRP 652 Stanley 1 ea Electric Strike 6211 630 Von Duprin1 ea Storeroom Lock L9080L 03N 626 Schlage1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best1 ea Closer 4110 689 LCN

1 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 40 B3E 630 Rockwood 1 ea Floor Stop 443 626 Rockwood1 ea Power Supply PS902 -- Schlage1 ea Door Contact 1078C -- Sentrol1 ea Request to Exit DS-150i -- Bosch1 ea Door Ajar Sounder PA400 -- System Sensor* Card Reader & balance of access control components by Section 281300.

Set #04 Openings: R006, R128 4 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 1 ea Push Plate 70F 630 Rockwood1 ea Pull Plate BF110 x 70B 630 Rockwood1 ea Closer 4110 689 LCN1 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 34 B3E 630 Rockwood1 ea Mop Plate K1050 4 x 35 B3E 630 Rockwood1 ea Floor Stop 443 630 Rockwood1 ea Kick Down Stop 461 626 Rockwood

Set #05 Opening: R127 4 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 1 ea Push Plate 70F 630 Rockwood1 ea Pull Plate BF110 x 70B 630 Rockwood1 ea Closer 4110 689 LCN1 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 34 B3E 630 Rockwood1 ea Mop Plate K1050 4 x 35 B3E 630 Rockwood1 ea Overhead Stop 104S 630 GJ 1 ea Kick Down Stop 461 626 Rockwood

 

Set #06 Openings: 007a, 007b, 008a, 008b 4 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 1 ea Exit Device 99L-03 626 Von Duprin1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best1 ea Closer 4110SCush 689 LCN1 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 34 B3E 630 Rockwood

    

Page 52: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Door Hardware The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 087110 - 10

Set #07 Openings: 007c, 124b, 125b 8 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 1 ea Automatic Flush Bolt 1940 (Top Bolt) 626 Rockwood1 ea Flush Bolt 557 (Bottom Bolt) 626 Rockwood1 ea Dust Proof Strike 570 626 Rockwood1 ea Storeroom Lock L9080L 03N 626 Schlage1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best 2 ea Floor Stop 443 630 Rockwood1 ea Threshold 513 MS/LA (@ 124c & 125b only) 719 NGP

 

Set #08 Opening: 009a 4 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 1 ea Classroom Lock L9070L 03N 626 Schlage1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best1 ea Closer 4111S-Cush 689 LCN1 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 34 B3E 630 Rockwood

 

Set #08A Opening: 009b 3 ea Hinge FBB179 5 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 1 ea Classroom Lock L9070L 03N 626 Schlage1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best1 ea Closer 4011 689 LCN1 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 38 B3E 630 Rockwood1 ea Floor Stop 443 626 Rockwood

 

Set #09 Openings: 101a, 101b, 101d, 101e, 101f, 101g, 101h, 101j, 101k, 101l 4 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 1 ea Office Lock L9050L 03N 626 Schlage1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best1 ea Wall Stop 401 630 Rockwood

 

Set #10 Opening: 101m 4 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 1 ea Classroom Lock L9070L 03N 626 Schlage1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best1 ea Wall Stop 401 630 Rockwood

 

Set #11 Opening: 101n 4 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley1 ea Classroom Lock L9070L 03N 626 Schlage

Page 53: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Door Hardware The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 087110 - 11

1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best1 ea Overhead Stop 104S 630 GJ

 

Set #12 Opening: 101o 4 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley1 ea Classroom Lock L9070L 03N 626 Schlage

1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best 1 ea Closer 4011 689 LCN1 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 34 B3E 630 Rockwood1 ea Floor Stop 443 626 Rockwood

 

Set #13 Opening: 101q 4 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 1 ea Classroom Lock L9070L 03N 626 Schlage1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best1 ea Closer 4011 689 LCN1 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 34 B3E 630 Rockwood1 ea Floor Stop 443 626 Rockwood

 

Set #14 Openings: 103a, 103b, 124a, 125a, 122d, 105d 8 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 2 ea Exit Device 9927L-03-LBR 626 Von Duprin2 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best2 ea Closer 4110SCush 689 LCN2 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 35 B3E 630 Rockwood1 ea Threshold 513 MS/LA (@ 124a & 125a only) 719 NGP

 

Set #14A Openings: Q204 8 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 2 ea Exit Device 9927L-03-LBR 626 Von Duprin2 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best2 ea Closer 4111 689 LCN2 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 35 B3E 630 Rockwood2 ea Floor Stops 443 626 Rockwood

 

Set #15 Opening: 103c 1 ea Continuous Hinge SL24HD 652 Stanley 1 ea Automatic Flush Bolt 1840 (Top Bolt) 626 Rockwood1 ea Flush Bolt 555 (Bottom Bolt) 626 Rockwood1 ea Dust Proof Strike 570 626 Rockwood

Page 54: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Door Hardware The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 087110 - 12

1 ea Classroom Lock L9070L 03N 626 Schlage1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best1 ea Closer 4010H 689 LCN1 ea Door Holder & Stop 494R 626 Rockwood

 

Set #16

Openings: 103d 2 ea Continuous Hinge SL24HD 628 Select 2 ea Exit Device 9927EO 626 Von Duprin2 ea Closer 4110SCush 689 LCN2 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 1” LDW B3E 630 Rockwood1 ea Threshold 896S RCE MS/LA 628 NGP1 set Perimeter Seal 700SA 628 NGP1 set Astragal Seal 137SA 628 NGP2 ea Door Sweep 200NA 628 NGP2 ea Door Contact 1078C -- Sentrol1 ea Door Ajar Sounder PA400 -- System Sensor

 

Set #16A Openings: Q101, F101a 2 ea Continuous Hinge SL24HD EPT 628 Select 2 ea Power Transfer EPT-10 689 Von Duprin 1 ea Exit Device RX-EL9927DT 626 Von Duprin 1 ea Exit Device RX-EL9927NL 626 Von Duprin 1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best 2 ea Closer 4110S-Cush 689 LCN 1 ea Threshold 896S RCE MS/LA 628 NGP 1 set Perimeter Seal 700SA 628 NGP 1 set Astragal Seal 137SA 628 NGP 2 ea Door Sweep 200NA 628 NGP 2 ea Door Contact 1078C -- Sentrol 1 ea Power Supply PS914-2RS --- Von Duprin 1 ea Junction Box JB-7 --- Von Duprin 1 ea Door Ajar Sounder PA400 -- System Sensor * Card Reader & balance of access control components by Section 281300.  Set #17 Opening: 103e 4 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley1 ea Office Lock L9050L 03N 626 Schlage1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best1 ea Overhead Stop 904S 630 GJ

 

Set #18 Opening: 103f, Z202 4 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley

Page 55: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Door Hardware The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 087110 - 13

1 ea Exit Device 99L-BE-03 626 Von Duprin1 ea Closer 4010 689 LCN1 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 34 B3E 630 Rockwood1 ea Wall Stop 401 630 Rockwood1 ea Door Contact 1078C -- Sentrol1 ea Door Ajar Sounder PA400 -- System Sensor

Set #18A Opening: Z102a 4 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 1 ea Exit Device 99L-BE-03 626 Von Duprin1 ea Closer 4010 689 LCN1 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 34 B3E 630 Rockwood1 ea Wall Stop 401 630 Rockwood

 

Set #19A Opening: 103g 4 ea Hinge FBB179 5 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley1 ea Storeroom Lock L9080L 03N 626 Schlage1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best1 ea Overhead Stop 104S 630 GJ

 

Set #20 Opening: 103h, Z102b 1 ea Continuous Hinge SL24HD 628 Select 1 ea Exit Device 99EO 626 Von Duprin1 ea Closer 4110Cush 689 LCN1 ea Threshold 896S RCE MS/LA 628 NGP1 set Perimeter Seal 700SA 628 NGP1 ea Door Sweep 200NA 628 NGP1 ea Door Contact 1078C -- Sentrol1 ea Door Ajar Sounder PA400 -- System Sensor

 

Set #21 Openings: 105a, 113a, 113b, 122a, 122b, 122c, 113c, 113d 6 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 2 ea Flushbolt 557 626 Rockwood1 ea Dust Proof Strike 570 626 Rockwood1 ea Exit Device 9975L-03 626 Von Duprin1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best1 ea Closer 4110 689 LCN1 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 35 B3E 630 Rockwood2 ea Wall Stop 401 630 Rockwood

 

Page 56: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Door Hardware The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 087110 - 14

Set #23 Opening: Z109 4 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley1 ea Storeroom Lock L9080L 03N 626 Schlage1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best1 ea Closer 4110 689 LCN1 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 34 B3E 630 Rockwood1 ea Wall Stop 401 630 Rockwood

 

Set #24 Opening: B15 6 ea Hinges FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 1 ea Exit Device LX-RX-EL9927DT-F 626 Von Duprin 1 ea Exit Device LX-RX-EL9927NL-F 626 Von Duprin 1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best 2 ea Closer 4111 689 LCN 2 ea Kickplates K1050 8 x 35 B3E 630 Rockwood 2 ea Floor Stops 443 626 Rockwood 2 ea Power Transfers EPT-10 689 Von Duprin 1 ea Power Supply PS914-2RS --- Von Duprin 2 ea Door Contact 1078C --- Sentrol 1 ea Junction Box JB-7 --- Von Duprin 1 ea Door Ajar Sounder PA400 -- System Sensor * Card Reader & balance of access control components by Section 281300.  Set #25 Opening: 124e 1 ea Continuous Hinge SL24HD 628 Select 1 ea Exit Device 99EO 626 Von Duprin1 ea Closer 4110 689 LCN1 ea Threshold 896S RCE MS/LA 628 NGP1 set Perimeter Seal 700SA 628 NGP1 ea Door Sweep 200NA 628 NGP1 ea Wall Stop 401 630 Rockwood1 ea Door Contact 1078C -- Sentrol1 ea Door Ajar Sounder PA400 -- System Sensor

 

Set #26 Opening: M004, 121a, M202a 8 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 1 ea Automatic Flush Bolt 1940 (Top Bolt) 626 Rockwood1 ea Flush Bolt 557 (Bottom Bolt) 626 Rockwood1 ea Dust Proof Strike 570 626 Rockwood1 ea Storeroom Lock L9080L 03N 626 Schlage1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best2 ea Overhead Stop 104S 630 GJ

 

Page 57: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Door Hardware The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 087110 - 15

8 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 1 ea Automatic Flush Bolt 1940 (Top Bolt) 626 Rockwood1 ea Flush Bolt 557 (Bottom Bolt) 626 Rockwood1 ea Dust Proof Strike 570 626 Rockwood1 ea Classroom Lock L9070L 03N 626 Schlage1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best 2 ea Overhead Stop 104S 630 GJ

Set #27 Opening: Z208 4 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley1 ea Storeroom Lock L9080L 03N 626 Schlage1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best1 ea Closer 4011 689 LCN 1 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 34 B3E 630 Rockwood1 ea Wall Stop 401 630 Rockwood

 

Set #28 Opening: 203a

Set #29 Opening: 203c 1 ea Continuous Hinge SL24HD 628 Select 1 ea Institution Lock L9082L 03N 626 Schlage2 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best1 ea Closer 4110Cush 689 LCN1 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 34 B3E 630 Rockwood1 ea Threshold 896S RCE MS/LA 628 NGP1 set Perimeter Seal 700SA 628 NGP1 ea Door Sweep 200NA 628 NGP

 

Set #33 Opening: B14 6 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 2 ea Flush Bolt 557 626 Rockwood1 ea Dust Proof Strike 570 626 Rockwood1 ea Dormitory Lock L9473L 03N 626 Schlage1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best2 ea Wall Stop 401 630 Rockwood

 

Set #34 Openings: 122e, 122f 6 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 2 ea Exit Device 9927L-03-LBR 626 Von Duprin2 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best2 ea Closer 4110SCush 689 LCN2 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 35 B3E 630 Rockwood

Page 58: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Door Hardware The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 087110 - 16

 

Set #35 Opening: F101b 2 ea Continuous Hinge SL24HD EPT 628 Select

2 ea Power Transfer EPT-10 689 Von Duprin 1 ea Exit Device RX-EL9927DT 626 Von Duprin1 ea Exit Device RX-EL9927NL 626 Von Duprin1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best1 ea Automatic Operator 9150 689 LCN1 ea Threshold 896S RCE MS/LA 628 NGP1 set Perimeter Seal 700SA 628 NGP1 set Astragal Seal 137SA 628 NGP2 ea Door Sweep 200NA 628 NGP1 ea Bollard BPSIG AHOOD (prepped for card reader) 630 Wikk1 ea Bollard BPSIG AHOOD (prepped for actuator) 630 Wikk1 ea Actuator 8310-853 (vestibule) --- LCN2 ea Door Contact 1078C -- Sentrol1 ea Power Supply PS914-2RS --- Von Duprin1 ea Junction Box JB-7 --- Von Duprin1 ea Door Ajar Sounder PA400 -- System Sensor* Card Reader & balance of access control components by Section 281300.  Set #36 Openings: F101c 2 ea Continuous Hinge SL24HD 628 Select 2 ea Push/Pull Bar Set BF15747 630 Rockwood 2 ea Closer 4110SCush 689 LCN

 Set #36A Openings: F101d 2 ea Continuous Hinge SL24HD 628 Select 2 ea Push/Pull Bar Set BF15747 630 Rockwood1 ea Automatic Operator 9150 689 LCN1 ea Actuator 8310-818 --- LCN1 ea Flush Mount Box 8310-819F --- LCN

 

Set #37 Opening: J127, 4 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 1 ea Storeroom Lock L9080L 03N 626 Schlage1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best1 ea Wall Stop 401 630 Rockwood

 

Set #38 Opening: M202b 3 ea Hinge FBB191 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 626 Stanley1ea Storeroom Lock L9080 03N 626 Schlage

Page 59: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Door Hardware The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 087110 - 17

1 ea Closer 4110Cush 689 LCN1 ea Threshold 896S RCE MS/LA 628 NGP1 set Perimeter Seal 700SA 628 NGP1 ea Door Sweep 200NA 628 NGP

Set #39 Opening: P004, P102 4 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 1 ea Electric Strike 6211 (FSE @P102) 630 Von Duprin 1 ea Storeroom Lock L9080L 03N 626 Schlage 1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best 1 ea Closer 4010 689 LCN 1 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 34 B3E 630 Rockwood 1 ea Wall Stop 401 630 Rockwood 1 ea Power Supply PS902 -- Schlage 1 ea Door Contact 1078C -- Sentrol 1 ea Request to Exit DS-150i -- Bosch 1 ea Door Ajar Sounder PA400 -- System Sensor * Card Reader & balance of access control components by Section 281300.  Set #39A Opening: 203b 4 ea Hinge FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley 1 ea Electric Strike 6211 (FSE @P102) 630 Von Duprin 1 ea Storeroom Lock L9080L 03N 626 Schlage 1 ea Cylinder As Required 626 Best 1 ea Closer 4111Cush 689 LCN 1 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 34 B3E 630 Rockwood 1 ea Power Supply PS902 -- Schlage 1 ea Door Contact 1078C -- Sentrol 1 ea Request to Exit DS-150i -- Bosch 1 ea Door Ajar Sounder PA400 -- System Sensor * Card Reader & balance of access control components by Section 281300.

  Set #40 Opening: 122g 6 ea Hinges FBB191 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 630 Stanley 1 ea Exit Device 9975EO 626 Von Duprin1 set Automatic Flushbolts 1842 626 Rockwood1 ea Coordinator 1672 x FB-1 x (2) 1601AB BLK Rockwood2 ea Closers 4111S-Cush 689 LCN1 ea Kickplate K1050 8 x 34 B3E 630 Rockwood1 ea Threshold 896N RCE MS/LA 719 NGP 1 set Weatherstripping 5050C CLR NGP1 pc Weatherstripping 5050C (mount to HM astragal) CLR NGP2 ea Sweeps 200NA 628 NGP

Page 60: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Door Hardware The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 087110 - 18

2 ea Door Contact 1078C -- Sentrol1 ea Request to Exit DS-150i -- Bosch1 ea Door Ajar Sounder PA400 -- System Sensor

END OF SECTION 087110

Page 61: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glass and Glazing The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088100 - 1

SECTION 088100 GLASS AND GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included:

1. Provide glass and glazing for all exterior and interior openings as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

B. Work Not Included:

1. Glass and glazing not provided under this Section are as follows:

a. Section 102813 “Framed Mirrors”.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 018113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated or specified are minimums and are for detailing purposes only. Confirm glass thickness by analyzing project loads and in- service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet, as a minimum, the following criteria:

1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E1300, according to the following requirements:

a. Specified Design Wind Loads: 30 psf. b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically

or not more than 15 degrees off vertical under wind action. 1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less.

c. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: 1 lite per 1000 lites set more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind and snow action. 1) Load Duration: 30 days.

Page 62: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glass and Glazing The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088100 - 2

d. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all four edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1”, whichever is less. 1) For monolithic glass lites, heat treated to resist wind loads. 2) For insulating glass. 3) For laminated glass lites.

e. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites” ¼”.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120o F, ambient; 180o F, material surfaces.

1.4 REFERENCED STANDARDS

A. Reference Standards: Wherever the following abbreviations are used herein, they shall refer to the corresponding standard.

1. AAMA: American Architectural Manufacturers Association. 2. ANSI: American National Standards Institute. 3. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials. 4. Fed. Spec.: Federal Specification as established by the U.S. Government, General

Services Administration. 5. GANA: Glass Association of North America. 6. IGMA: Insulated Glass Manufacturers Alliance.

B. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations listed below, except where more stringent requirements are indicated herein.

1. Glass Association of North America (GANA) "Glazing Manual." 2. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) TIR-A7 "Sloped Glazing

Guidelines" and GDSG-1 "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing". 3. Insulated Glass Manufacturers Alliance (IGMA) TM-3000 "Vertical Glazing Guidelines" and

TB-3001 "Sloped Glazing Guidelines".

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project and who employs glass installers for this project who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

C. Safety Glass Standards: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1.

Page 63: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glass and Glazing The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088100 - 3

D. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of unit with appropriate certification label of Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC).

E. Allowable Tolerances: Thicknesses of glass specified are nominal; provide glass manufactured to tolerances listed in GANA Manual.

F. Fire- Rated Glass: Each lite shall bear permanent, non-removable label of UL certifying it for use in tested and rated fire protective assemblies.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each type of glass, glazing sealants and accessories required.

1. Indicate structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling requirements, etc.

B. Submit insulating glass manufacturer's certification indicating units meet or exceed specified requirements.

C. Submit laminated glass manufacturer's certification indicating units meet or exceed specified requirements.

D. Shop Drawings: Required data for shop drawings on glazing may be incorporated with shop drawings for framing members. Show thicknesses of glass; proposed "bites" in frames, sizes and locations of blocks, clips, beads, stops edge treatments; note quality, type and strength of each lite.

E. Samples: Submit and obtain approval of samples before proceeding with glass fabrication. Minimum two 12" x 12" samples of each glass type required, except clear monolithic glass. Submit color samples of exposed sealants and/or gaskets.

F. Special Environmental Requirements’: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 81 13:

1. Product Data: For Sealant and Adhesives, documentation indicating VOC Content 2. Local/Regional Materials:

a. Sourcing location(s): Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and recovery; indicate distance between extraction, harvesting, and recovery and the project site.

b. Manufacturing location(s): Indicate location of manufacturing facility; indicate distance between manufacturing facility and the project site.

c. Product Value: Indicate dollar value of product containing local/regional materials; include materials cost only.

d. Product Component(s) Value: Where product components are sourced or manufactured in separate locations, provide location information for each component. Indicate the percentage by weight of each component per unit of product

Page 64: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glass and Glazing The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088100 - 4

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store and handle glazing materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent damage and deterioration.

B. Various items to receive glazing as specified elsewhere may be factory-glazed or site-glazed at Contractor's option.

C. Deliver glazing compounds and sealants in manufacturer's unopened labeled containers.

D. Deliver glass with manufacturer's labels intact. Do not remove labels until glass has been installed.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field verify measurements and conditions of installations.

B. Examine all details. Provide proper fitting for details indicated.

C. Do not perform work under adverse weather or job site conditions. Install liquid sealants when temperatures are within lower or middle third of temperature range recommendations by manufacturer.

D. Protect work from damage during and after installation until project acceptance.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Contractor to guarantee work under this Section against defects of materials, fabrication and installation. Guarantee period is one year, except where specified otherwise. Defects include, but are not necessarily limited to:

1. Weather tightness: Two (2) year warranty.

B. Insulating Glass: Submit manufacturer's written warranty that for ten (10) years from date of substantial completion, a replacement will be provided (furnished and installed) for any unit which develops edge separation, thermal stress cracks, or other defects which materially obstruct vision through the glass or affect thermal and physical integrity of insulating glass units, except warranty shall not cover glass breakage from other than natural causes. Defective units shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Laminated Glass: Submit manufacturer's written warranty that for five (5) years from date of substantial completion a replacement will be provided for laminated glass having manufacturing defects which result in edge separation or other defects which materially obstruct vision through the glass. Defective units shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Coated Glass: Submit manufacturer's written warranty that for five (5) years from date of substantial completion, a replacement will be provided for defective units. Defects are defined as peeling, cracking or deterioration in coating due to normal conditions and not due to handling or installation contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions. Defective units shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Page 65: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glass and Glazing The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088100 - 5

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Fabricators: Specifications herein are based on glass and materials manufactured or fabricated by the following companies. Not all firms listed manufacture or fabricate all the items specified herein. However, to ensure consistent quality of appearance and performance, provide each type or kind of glass or material from a single source. Manufacturers for specialty products are listed within the specification to establish a particular type, color, pattern, etc. Equal products by the manufacturers listed are acceptable providing they meet the type, color, pattern, etc. as approved by the Architect.

1. Manufacturers

a. AGC FLOAT GLASS NORTH AMERICA b. PPG c. GUARDIAN INDUSTRIES d. PILKINGTON NORTH AMERICA

2. Fabricators

a. VIRACON b. OLDCASTLE BUILDINGENVELOPE c. ARCH ALUMINUM & GLASS LLC

2.2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS

A. Conformance: Type I, Class 1 for clear glass, Class 2-tinted heat-absorbing and light-reducing; Class 3 for tinted, light-reducing glass, Quality q3, conforming to ASTM C1036.

B. Thickness: 1/4", unless otherwise indicated.

C. Color: Clear.

1. When used in insulating units, provide color specified under each insulating unit.

2.3 HEAT TREATED FLOAT GLASS

A. Conformance: Condition A, Kind FT, Type I, Class 1 for clear glass, Class 2-tinted heat-absorbing and light-reducing; Class 3 for tinted, light-reducing glass, conforming to ASTM C1048.

B. Thickness: 1/4", unless otherwise indicated.

C. Color: Clear.

1. When used in insulating units, provide color specified under each insulating unit.

2.4 COATED FLOAT GLASS

A. General: Provide coated glass complying with this article and in schedules at the end of Part 3.

Page 66: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glass and Glazing The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088100 - 6

B. Low E, Sputter Coated Float Glass: Float glass with metallic-oxide or metallic nitride coating deposited by vacuum deposition process after manufacture and heat treatment (if any), complying with requirements specified in schedules at end of Part 3.

C. Coated Spandrel Float Glass:

1. General: Heat treated with ceramic frit color coating fused to inside surface. 2. Conformance: Condition B, Kind FT, Type I, Class 1, conforming to ASTM C1048. 3. Thickness: 1/4", unless otherwise indicated. 4. Color: See schedule

2.5 WIRE GLASS

A. Wire Glass: USE PROHIBITED.

2.6 LAMINATED GLASS – Translucent

A. Conformance: Kind LHS conforming to ASTM C1172 "Laminated Architectural Flat Glass" and ANSI Z97.1.

B. Thickness

1. Top pane 3/8”, clear Kind HS. 2. Bottom pane ½” clear Kind HS.

C. Interlayer: Two layers .030” thick each; clear and frosted and as indicated below; with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation.

D. Laminating Process: Fabricate to produce glass free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets as follows:

1. Laminate lites with polyvinyl butyral interlayer in autoclave with heat plus pressure.

E. Design: Provide design based on structural data.

2.7 INSULATING GLASS

A. Sealed Insulating Glass: General: Provide preassembled units consisting of organically sealed panes of glass enclosing a hermetically sealed dehydrated air space and complying with ASTM E774 for performance classification indicated as well as with other requirements specified for glass characteristics, air space, sealing system, sealant, spacer material, corner design and desiccant.

1. For properties of individual glass making up units, refer to requirements specified in schedule at the end of Part 3 as applicable to types, kinds, classes and conditions.

2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites to comply with glass design requirements. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is indicated or required.

Page 67: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glass and Glazing The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088100 - 7

B. Edge Construction: Twin primary seals of polyisobutylene; tubular spacer-bar frame with manufacturer’s standard corner construction, and filled with desiccant; and secondary seal outside of bar, bonded to both sheets of glass and bar, or polysulfied, silicone or hot-melt butyl elastomeric sealant.

1. Spacer to have mill or clear anodized finish.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLASS TYPES

A. Fire-Rated Glass

1. 20 Minute - For use in 20 minute rated doors only. Superlite I manufactured by SAFTI FIRST, PyroEdge-20 by INTEREDGE TECHNOLOGIES or Fireglass 20 by Technical Glass Products. ¼” thick tempered glass with a 20 minute fire-rating.

2. 45 Minute - For use in 45 minute door and window applications. Superlite II- XL manufactured by SAFTI FIRST, Pyrobel by INTEREDGE TECHNOLOGIES or Pyrostop by PILKINGTON. ¾” thick unit comprised of inboard and outboard tempered lites protecting a fire resistive interlayer.

2.9 GLAZING MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Glazing Sealants and Compounds

1. General: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the weatherproofing system that comply with the current VOC content limits of South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168, AND all sealants used as fillers must meet or exceed the requirements of the Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51.

2. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for selection of hardness. Select materials and variations or modifications for compatibility with surfaces contacted in the installation.

3. Exterior Glazing: One part silicone rubber non-sag glazing sealant, complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G and A as applicable. Provide acid type recommended by manufacturer where only non-porous bond surfaces are contacted; provide non-acid type where one or more porous bond surfaces are contacted.

a. Acid Curing Type - Manufacturers 1) BOSTIK CONSTRUCTION PRODUCTS "Chem-calk 1200" 2) DOW CORNING "999" 3) GE "SCS 1200" 4) PECORA "863" 5) TREMCO "Proglaze"

b. Non-Acid Curing Type - Manufacturers 1) DOW CORNING "795" 2) GE "Silpruf" 3) TREMCO "Spectrum 2"

4. Interior Glazing: Compound of polymerized butyl rubber and inert fillers, with or without polyisobutylene modification, solvent based, 95% solids, formed and coiled on release paper, tack-free in 24 hours, paintable, non-staining.

B. Gaskets: Where applicable for dry glazing aluminum work, provide one of the following types:

Page 68: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glass and Glazing The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088100 - 8

1. Cellular Type: Molded or extruded closed cell integral-skinned neoprene gaskets for watertight construction; comply with ASTM C509, Type II, black.

2. Elastomeric Compression Type: Extruded, flexible gaskets of EPDM of the profile and hardness as required for watertight construction; comply with ASTM C864.

3. Manufacturers: Provide products meeting or exceeding the above requirements as manufactured by one of the following:

a. TREMCO b. D.S. BROWN COMPANY c. MANTALINE CORP. d. MALONEY PRECISION PRODUCTS

C. Miscellaneous Glazing Materials

1. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. 2. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 80-90 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility

with sealants used. 3. Spacers: Neoprene or EPDM, 40-50 durometer hardness with proven compatibility with

sealants used. 4. Compressible Filler (Rod): Closed cell or waterproof jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber

or plastic form, compatible space with sealants used, flexible and resilient, with 5-10 psi compression strength for 25% deflection.

D. Glazing Film: Interior Design Film manufactured by 3M ENERGY CONTROL PRODUCTS or equal by VISTA FILMS, CP FILMS or DECORATIVE FILM, LLC.

1. Design: Perforated appearance. Amount of perforations as selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. Selection to be in the 50% range.

2.10 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Glass Cutting: Cut glass to accurate sizes and shapes as indicated on drawings. Allow edge clearances and tolerances in accordance with GANA recommendations.

1. Edges: Provide factory-cutting and factory-formed edges for all butt- glazed, heat tempered and insulating glass. Provide ground edges for all drilled holes, notches and other fabrication or finishing techniques.

2. Butt-Glazed Systems: All work in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

a. Edges Exposed to Air: Polished finish. b. Edges Receiving Sealant: “Suede” finish. c. Concealed Edges: Factory option.

C. Heat Strengthened and Tempered Glass

1. Heat Strengthened: Heat treated to strengthen glass in bending to not less than 2.0 times annealed strength for the strengthened glass.

2. Tempered: Heat treated to strengthen glass in bending to not less than 4 to 5 times annealed glass strength for the strengthened glass.

Page 69: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glass and Glazing The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088100 - 9

3. Cut glass to required size before tempering. Comply with Glass Tempering Association recommendations.

4. Provide tongless tempered glass. When size limitations require tong edges, support each piece during tempering process so that tong marks will be concealed in the glazed system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine substrates, substructure and installation conditions. Do not proceed with glazing work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for satisfactory performance.

3.2 PROTECTION AND PREPARATION

A. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation. Remove and legally dispose damaged glass off of the project site. Damaged glass is defined as glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and/or appearance.

B. Do not cut, seam, nip or abrade tempered glass.

C. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation and eliminate any which have observable edge damage or face imperfections.

D. Unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match other pieces, as nearly as possible. Inspect each piece and set with pattern, draw, and bow oriented in same direction as other pieces.

E. Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass immediately before glazing. Remove loose coatings. Apply primer to joint surfaces receiving sealants when recommended by sealant manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Comply with combined recommendations and technical reports of manufacturer's of glass and glazing materials used with GANA "Glazing Manual", except when more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Install insulating units to comply with recommendations by IGMA, except as otherwise specifically indicated or recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers.

C. Glazing channel dimensions shown are intended to provide for necessary bite on glass, minimum edge clearance and adequate sealant thickness, with reasonable tolerance. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installation.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, properly sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

Page 70: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glass and Glazing The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088100 - 10

E. Install primers, sealants, tapes, and gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Set glass without springing and install securely to prevent rattling or breakage.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes edge-to-edge, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit openings.

C. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gaskets by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

Page 71: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glass and Glazing The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088100 - 11

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealant to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Watertight and airtight installation of exterior glass and glazing required. Each installation shall withstand normal temperature changes, wind loading, impact loading (for operating doors) without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants of gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work.

B. After completion of glazing, test for water leaks. Flood joints exposure with water directed from 3/4" hose held perpendicular to wall face, 2'-0" from joint, connected to a water system with standard city pressure.

C. Test approximately 25% of the total glazing system, in locations which are typical of all joint conditions, and which can be inspected easily for leakage on opposite face. Conduct tests in presence of Architect.

D. Repair glazing installation at leaks or, if leakage is excessive, replace glazing sealants and gaskets as directed.

3.8 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation by attachment of streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers of any type to surfaces of glass. Remove non-permanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Maintain glass in a reasonable clean condition during construction so that it will not be damaged by corrosive action, and will not contribute (by wash off) to the deterioration of glazing materials and other work. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.

C. Wash and polish on both faces not more than four days before acceptance of the work. Comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning.

3.9 GLAZING SCHEDULE

A. GL-5T: ¼” Clear tempered glass

B. GL-6T: (1) 1/4” tempered etched glass with .030” arctic snow and .030” clear PVB interlayer and (1) 1/8” clear tempered. Total thickness 7/16”.

C. Type GL-1 / GL-1T: Provide 1 inch insulated annealed or tempered glass, as required by code, as follows:

1. Outboard Lite: 1/4 VRE24-54 #2 Low-E on clear glass. 2. Air Space: 1/2 inch warm edge spacer w/ argon gas black silicone seal. 3. Inboard Lite: ¼ inch Clear 4. Performance Characteristics

a. Visible Light Transmittance: 50% b. Solar Energy Transmittance: 33%

Page 72: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glass and Glazing The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088100 - 12

c. U-V Transmittance: 17% d. Visible Light Reflectance Exterior: 30% e. Visible Light Reflectance Interior: 19% f. Solar Energy reflectance: 38% g. Winter Nighttime U-Value: .30 h. Summer Daytime U-Value: .27 i. Shading Coefficient: .38 j. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: .33 k. Relative Heat Gain: 79

D. Type GGL-2 / GL-2T Provide 1 inch insulated annealed or tempered spandrel glass, as required by code, as follows:

1. Glass type same as GL-1 / GL-1T. Add V175 hich-opacity white paint on surface #4.

E. Type GL-3 / GL-3T: Provide 1 inch insulated annealed or tempered glass, as required by code, as follows:

1. Outboard Lite: 1/4 VRE 24-54 #2 Low-E on clear glass w/ V901 dark grey silk-screen 50% coverage using #5Ø23, #2 surface.

2. Air Space: 1/2 inch warm edge spacer w/ argon gas black silicone seal. 3. Inboard Lite: ¼ inch Clear HS 4. Performance Characteristics

a. Visible Light Transmittance: 29% b. Solar Energy Transmittance: 16% c. U-V Transmittance: 9% d. Visible Light Reflectance Exterior: 22% e. Visible Light Reflectance Interior: 22% f. Solar Energy reflectance: 26% g. Winter Nighttime U-Value: .26 h. Summer Daytime U-Value: .22 i. Shading Coefficient: .26 j. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: .22 k. Relative Heat Gain: 55

F. Type GL-4 / GL-4T: Provide 1 inch insulated annealed or tempered glass, as required by code, as follows:

1. Outboard Lite: 1/4 VRE 24-54 #2 Low-E on clear glass 2. Air Space: 1/2 inch warm edge spacer w/ argon gas black silicone seal. 3. Inboard Lite: ¼ inch Clear w/ V1086 simulated sandblast #3 4. Performance Characteristics

a. Visible Light Transmittance: 23% b. Solar Energy Transmittance: 14% c. U-V Transmittance: 4% d. Visible Light Reflectance Exterior: 34% e. Visible Light Reflectance Interior: 21% f. Solar Energy reflectance: 40% g. Winter Nighttime U-Value: .26 h. Summer Daytime U-Value: .22 i. Shading Coefficient: .33 j. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: .29 k. Relative Heat Gain: 70

Page 73: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glass and Glazing The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088100 - 13

END OF SECTION 088300

Page 74: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

 

Page 75: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Mirrors The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088300 - 1

SECTION 088300 MIRRORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors:

1. Safety backed glass mirrors.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 018113 “Sustainable Design Requirements”. 2. Section 088100 “Glass and Glazing”. 3. Section 102813 “Toilet Accessories” (Framed Mirrors).

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Deterioration of Mirrors: Defects developed from normal uses that are attributable to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to mirror manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide mirrors that will not fail under normal usage. Failure includes glass breakage and deterioration attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations indicating vertical joint layout, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments to other work.

B. Samples: For each type of mirror product required, in the form indicated below:

1. Mirrors, 12 inches square, including edge and frame treatment on 2 adjoining edges.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror and mirror mastic, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

Page 76: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Mirrors The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088300 - 2

E. Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test Reports: From mirror manufacturer indicating that mirror mastic was tested for compatibility and adhesion with mirror backing film and substrates on which mirrors are installed.

F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed mirror glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in mirror installations with a record of successful in- service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under NGA's Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).

B. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from one source for each type of mirror indicated.

C. Source Limitations for Mirror Glazing Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from one source for each type of accessory indicated.

D. Glazing Publications: Comply with the following published recommendations:

1. GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

2. GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."

E. Reference Standards

1. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials.

a. ASTM C1503: Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror b. ASTM C1036: Standard Specification for Flat Glass c. ASTM C1048: Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass—Kind HS,

Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass

F. Safety Glazing Products: For film-backed tempered mirrors, provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.

G. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing film and various substrates on which mirrors are installed.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to mirrors from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

Page 77: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Mirrors The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088300 - 3

B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors, protected from moisture including condensation.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by mirror manufacturer agreeing to replace mirrors that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below:

1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Contract Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mirrors by one of the following:

1. ARCH ALUMINUM & GLASS CO., INC. 2. GARDNER GLASS PRODUCTS. 3. GUARDIAN INDUSTRIES CORP. 4. LENOIR MIRROR COMPANY. 5. VIRGINIA MIRROR COMPANY, INC.

2.2 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRROR MATERIALS

A. Safety Backed Glass Mirrors: Organically Coated Mirrors complying with CPSC 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1 standards and manufactured with a sheet of adhesive backed polyethylene material to the back of annealed mirrors.

1. Nominal Thickness: ¼”. 2. Annealed Clear Glass Mirrors: Comply with ASTM C1503, Mirror Glazing Quality; clear

float glass conforming with ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q2. 3. Safety Backing Properties:

a. Tensile Strength: 6 psi b. Elongation: 550% c. Thickness: 4.5 mils d. Peel adhesion: 18 oz.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

Page 78: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Mirrors The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088300 - 4

B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.

C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. GUNTHER MIRROR MASTICS. b. PALMER PRODUCTS CORPORATION.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions, and before tempering, cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes. See drawings for sizes. At wall-to-wall conditions, field verify dimensions prior to fabricating mirrors.

B. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts before tempering for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.

C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Beveled polished edge of width shown.

1. Seal edges of mirrors after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating.

2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror mastic with existing finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with mirror installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating surfaces with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable.

Page 79: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Mirrors The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088300 - 5

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images.

B. Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

C. For wall-mounted mirrors, install mirrors with mastic.

1. Install mastic as follows:

a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of mirrors and backing material.

b. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer’s written instructions for coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

c. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.

B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.

C. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.

END OF SECTION 088300

Page 80: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

 

Page 81: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glazing Surface Film The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088700 - 1

SECTION 08 87 00 GLAZING SURFACE FILM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Privacy Window Film.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 08 50 00 "Windows" for Windows to receive architectural window film. 2. Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" for General Glazing applications to receive architectural window

film.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. SHRAE - American Society for Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers; Handbook of Fundamentals, 1997 Edition.

B. ASTM E 84 - Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

C. ASTM E 308 - Standard Recommended Practice for Spectophotometry and Description of Color in CIE 1931 System.

D. ASTM E 903 - Standard Methods of Test for Solar Absorbance, Reflectance and Transmittance of Materials Using Integrating Spheres.

E. ASTM G 26 - Standard Practice for Performing Accelerated Outdoor Weatherizing for Nonmetallic Materials Using Concentrated Natural Sunlight.

F. ASTM D 3330, “Standard Test Methods for Peel-Adhesion at 180 Degree Angle”.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire Performance: Surface burning characteristics when tested in accordance ASTM E 84:

1. Flame Spread: 25, maximum. 2. Smoke Developed: 450, maximum.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00.

Page 82: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glazing Surface Film The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088700 - 2

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.

C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples representing actual product, color, and patterns.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be supplied by a single manufacturer with a minimum of ten (10) years experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: All products listed in this section are to be installed by a single installer with a minimum of five (5) years demonstrated experience in installing products of the same type and scope as specified.

1. Provide documentation that the installer is authorized by the Manufacturer to perform Work specified in this section.

2. Provide a commercial building reference list of five (5) properties where the installer has applied window film. This list will include the following information:

a. Name of building. b. The name and telephone number of a management contact. c. Type of glass. d. Type of film. e. Amount of film installed. f. Date of completion.

3. Provide a Glass Stress Analysis of the existing glass and proposed glass/film combination as recommended by the film manufacturer.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Store and dispose of hazardous materials, and materials contaminated by hazardous materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. At project closeout, provide to Owner an executed current copy of the manufacturer’s standard limited warranty against manufacturing defect, outlining its terms, conditions, and exclusions from coverage.

Page 83: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glazing Surface Film The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088700 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. 3M Window Films, St. Paul, MN - BASIS OF DESIGN 2. Decorative Films, LLC 3. LLumar Window Film

2.2 SINGLE PATTERNED FILM

A. Fasara - Mat Crystal I Decorative / Privacy Glazing Film:

1. Ultraviolet Rejected (ASTM E 903): Not less than 99 percent. 2. Visible Light Transmission (ASTM E 903, ASTM E308): Not more than 83 percent. 3. Visible Light Rejected (ASTM E 903): Not less than 8 percent. 4. Solar Heat Reduction: Not less than 8 percent. 5. Shading Coefficient at 90 Degrees (Normal Incidence) (ASTM E 903): Not less than 0.91.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine glass and surrounding adjacent surfaces for conditions affecting installations

1. Report any conditions that may adversely affect installations. In report, include description of any glass that is broken, chopped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way.

B. Process with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

C. Protect window frames and surrounding conditions from damage during installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Cut film edges neatly and square at a uniform distance of 1/8 inch (3 mm) to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of window sealant. Use new blade tips after 3 to 4 cuts.

C. Spray the slip solution, composed of one capful of baby shampoo or dishwashing liquid to 1 gallon of water, on window glass and adhesive to facilitate proper positioning of film.

Page 84: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Glazing Surface Film The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 088700 - 4

D. Apply film to glass and lightly spray film with slip solution.

E. Squeegee from top to bottom of window. Spray slip solution to film and squeegee a second time.

F. Bump film edge with lint-free towel wrapped around edge of a 5-way tool.

G. Upon completion of film application, allow 30 days for moisture from film installation to dry thoroughly, and to allow film to dry flat with no moisture dimples, wrinkles, blisters or other defects.

H. After installation, view film from a distance of 10 feet against a bright uniform sky or background. Film shall appear uniform in appearance with no visible dimples, wrinkles, streaks, banding, thin spots, or pinholes.

1. If installed film does not meet this criteria, remove and replace with new film.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove left over material and debris from Work area. Use necessary means to protect film before, during, and after installation.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

C. After application of film, wash film using common window cleaning solutions, including ammonia solutions, 30 days after application. Do not use abrasive type cleaning agents and bristle brushes to avoid scratching film. Use synthetic sponges or soft cloths.

END OF SECTION

Page 85: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Louvers and Vents The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 089000 - 1

SECTION 089000 LOUVERS AND VENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included:

1. Provide wall louvers as indicated. All louvers on exterior of building to be provided under this Section.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 079200 “Sealant”.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Reference Standards: Wherever the following abbreviations are used herein, they shall refer to the corresponding standard.

1. AMCA: Air Moving and Conditioning Association. 2. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association. 3. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials. 4. NAAMM: National Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association. 5. AAMA: American Architectural Manufacturers Association.

B. Performance Requirements: Provide units whose performance ratings have been determined in compliance with AMCA Standard 500 and 511.

C. Water Penetration and Free Area: Meet AMCA Standard for louvers specified.

D. Wind Load: Design louvers and supports for 20 pounds per square foot wind load.

E. Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations for fabrication, construction details and installation procedures, except as otherwise indicated.

F. Field Measurements: Verify size, location and placement of louver units prior to fabrication wherever possible.

G. Shop Assembly: Coordinate field measurements with fabrication and shop assembly.

Page 86: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Louvers and Vents The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 089000 - 2

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications; certified test data, where applicable; and installation instructions for required products, including finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit plans, elevations and details of sections and connections to adjoining work. Indicate materials, finishes, fasteners, joinery and other information to determine compliance with specified requirements.

C. Samples: Submit finish samples showing the light and dark range limits of the anodizing color. These finish samples will be used in the field as a check for items specified in this Section. Anodized items whose color does not fall within the range indicated by these samples are unacceptable and shall not be used in the finished work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming or as otherwise recommended by the metal producer to provide the required finish.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221. Alloy 6063-T52.

C. Fasteners: Stainless Steel, 300 series.

D. Anchors and Inserts: Use non-ferrous metal anchors and inserts for exterior installation.

E. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant solvent type black bituminous mastic.

2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Provide louvers and accessories of design, materials, sizes, depth, arrangement and metal thicknesses indicated, or if not indicated, as required for optimum performance with respect to airflow; water penetration; strength; durability and uniform appearance as suited to applications shown and intended use.

B. Fabricate frames including integral sills to suit adjacent construction with adequate tolerances for installation including application of sealant in joints between louvers and adjoining work, where applicable.

C. Include supports, anchorages and accessories required to achieve a complete assembly, properly installed.

1. Deflection: Allow for ½” deflection, positive and negative at all applicable connection and joint locations including but not limited to head conditions.

D. Provide sill extensions and loose sills made of same material as louvers, where indicated or required, for drainage to exterior and to prevent water penetrating to interior.

E. Join frame members to one another and to stationary louver blades by field bolted connections made necessary by size of louvers. Maintain equal blade spacing including separation between blades and frames at head and sill to produce a uniform appearance.

Page 87: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Louvers and Vents The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 089000 - 3

F. Blank-Off Panels: Provide panels where indicated consisting of rigid extruded polystyrene or polyurethane insulation core with laminated .032 aluminum facing sheets. Provide with finish to match louvers.

2.3 STATIONARY EXTRUDED ALUMINUM WALL LOUVERS

A. Horizontal Blade Louvers: Size and depth indicated, with blades of profile, slope and spacing indicated, or if not indicated, to meet performance requirements.

1. Extrusion Thickness: Not less than .081" for blades and frames. 2. Furnish units complying with following performance requirements.

a. Free Area: Not less than 50%. b. Water Penetration: Not more than 0.01 oz. per square foot of free area at an

minimum intake airflow of 1000 fpm free area velocity.

B. Manufacturer and Type: Provide louver vane profile to match AIROLITE K6774 manufactured by AIROLITE; AIRLINE; ARROW; CONSTRUCTION SPECIALTIES; INDUSTRIAL LOUVERS; AMERICAN WARMING AND HEATING; RUSKIN; RELIABLE or PENN AIRSTREAM.

2.4 LOUVER SCREENS

A. Provide screens for exterior louvers.

B. Fabricate screen frames of the same metal and finish as the louver units to which secured, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide frames consisting of U-shaped metal for permanently securing screen mesh.

D. Size: 1/2" sq. mesh, 0.063" anodized aluminum wire.

E. Locate screens on inside face of louvers. Secure screens to louver frames with machine screws, spaced at each corner and at 12" o.c. between.

2.5 METAL FINISHES

A. All exposed aluminum surfaces shall receive an Architectural Class 1, champagne anodized coating; AA-M12C22A44, minimum 0.7 mil thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for the installation of anchorages which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate the delivery of such items to the project site.

B. INSTALLATION

C. Locate and place louver units plumb, level and in proper alignment with adjacent work.

Page 88: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Louvers and Vents The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 089000 - 4

D. Use concealed anchorages wherever possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

E. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for sealant and joint fillers as indicated.

F. Repair damaged finishes. Restore finishes so that there is no evidence of corrective work. Return items which cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make the required alterations, and refinish the entire unit, or provide new units, as directed by Architect.

G. Protect galvanized and non-ferrous metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by application of a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces which will be in contact with concrete, masonry or dissimilar metals.

H. Provide concealed gaskets and flashing and install as the work progresses to make the installations weathertight.

I. Refer to Section 07 92 00 for sealant in connection with installation of louvers.

END OF SECTION 089000

Page 89: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Resinous Flooring The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 097000 - 1

SECTION 097000 RESINOUS FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Performance Requirements:

1. Provide seamless flooring system which has been manufactured and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure.

2. The finished floor must be free of “pinholes” and surface defects which may compromise hygiene or cleaning requirements.

3. It must not be possible to separate the individual layers which make up the system. 4. Certified Applicator only system

B. Resin Properties:

1. The system is to be based on solvent-free 100% reactive resin. 2. The cured system must have a minimum of the following properties:

C. Properties of the cured system:

1. Must be fully cured in two hours and:

a. Minimum compressive of 12,000 psi b. Minimum tensile strength of 5,300 psi c. Resistant to ageing and UV attack d. Chemically Bonds with itself e. No V.O.C.’s f. Minimum Compressive strength within two hours

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Letter of verification of installer’s qualifications and acceptance from the manufacturer of the products.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer must be a certified Acrylicon installer. (Certified applicator only system) 2. The manufacturer of the specified products shall provide written approval of the installer

to the General Contractor, Owner, or Construction Manager prior to beginning work.

Page 90: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Resinous Flooring The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 097000 - 2

1.5 WARRANTIES

A. Manufacturer shall warrant materials are free from material defects and shall perform according to published literature if installed in accordance with correct procedures for a period of one year from completion.

B. Installer shall warrant that materials are mixed and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions and that installation shall be free from defects for a period of one year from completion.

C. Pre Installation Bond Testing:

1. Conduct bond test for surface preparation evaluation prior to application of coating system.

a. Manufacturer’s representative shall perform and document the bond testing. b. Perform two tests minimum or one bond test per 2000 square feet of floor area or

one in each location where the concrete is clearly seen to be a different pour/batch or color.

c. Document bond test by locating bond test on drawings and identifying actual bond test specimen to location on drawings.

d. Maintain test specimens at project office until completion of work.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Ordering: Comply with manufacturers ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.

B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturers original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer. Temperatures in storage area can not exceed 75 degrees F.

1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Proper moisture tests need to be performed. Normal limits for moisture vapor transmission for AcryliCon floors are 5-lbs./1,000 sq. ft./24 hour using the calcium chloride test per ASTM F-1869 & 80% relative humidity using in-situ Relative Humidity Testing per ASTM F-2170.

B. Concrete floor to be a steel trowel finish.

C. All roofing penetrations, openings and parapet areas to be sealed water tight by others prior to installation of the AcryliCon floor.

D. Finished electric lighting must be installed prior to application of the AcryliCon flooring.

E. If applicable, door jam juncture to cove base, automatic door jams, any base or other termination points or transition lines between the AcryliCon floor and other floor finishes must be marked and verified by the General Contractor.

Page 91: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Resinous Flooring The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 097000 - 3

F. All trades are denied access to areas that receive new AcryliCon floor during surface preparation and installation process.

G. Full depth concrete patching must be installed seven days prior to application of the floor system; consult AcryliCon USA for instructions.

H. Skim coating with cementious materials not allowed; consult Acrylicon USA for instructions.

I. Area to receive AcryliCon will be broom cleaned and cleared of all debris by the General Contractor prior to the arrival of installation crew.

J. General Contractor will dislodge or clean all dirt, mortar, paint overspray, grease and oil, or any other wet or dry surface contamination. (consult Acrylicon Technical Services for guidance).

K. Leaks through the roof, duct work or from any other source or area must be repaired immediately by the General Contractor.

L. Temperature Requirements: Maintain air and slab temperature in spaces where flooring is to be installed of not less than 45OF or more than 72OF for 48 hours prior to application and 24 hours after installation.

M. All AcryliCon flooring must be installed just prior to drywall installation to allow for proper sanding steps.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Acrylicon USA will assist in coordinating with the Certified installer the scheduling and requirements for the AcryliCon installation.

1.9 WARRANTIES

A. Manufacturer shall warrant materials are free from material defects and shall perform according to published literature if installed in accordance with correct procedures for a period of one year from completion.

B. Installer shall warrant that materials are mixed and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions and that installation shall be free from defects for a period of one year from completion

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Acrylicon: 2-3mm nominal thickness Acrylicon Flake (proprietary acrylic resin system)

1. Penetrating Primer Coat: Sealer with Primer Additive added on site 2. Body Coat: Resin 1061sw mixed with SV Filler & Pigment 3. Cast Colored Flake 4. Topcoat (s): Sealer top coat.

Page 92: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Resinous Flooring The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 097000 - 4

2.2 COLORS

A. Colors or blends selected by architect from the manufacturers’ dull range of color. Only approved flakes shall be utilized in the system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPROVED APPLICATORS

A. Shall have a minimum of three years previous experience and be fully trained in the application of the manufacturers systems. Certification to this effect will be required from the manufacturer prior to placing an order for material.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Concrete:

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials whose presence would interfere with the performance of the primer.

2. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the manufacturer.

3. Bond Test: shall retain some of slab aggregate on bottom of test patch when removed. 4. The concrete must be fully cured for a minimum of 28 days prior to application of the

coating system. 5. No curing compounds are permitted without prior written manufacturers’ approval. 6. Concrete and air temp must be between 45-72 F degrees throughout the installation.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Pre Installation Bond Testing: Conduct manufacturer’s recommended bond test for surface preparation evaluation prior to application of coating system in accordance with Clause 1.4. C

B. Concrete Surface Preparation:

1. Accessible concrete floor surfaces shall be mechanically prepared using a mobile shot blaster with dust extraction control similar to “Blastrac” type equipment or other mobile steel shot blast machines. Surfaces and embedded accumulations of paint, sealers or toppings, hardened concrete layers, laitance, power trowel finishes and other similar surface characteristics that inhibit the penetration of the primer into the substrate shall be completely removed, leaving a bare concrete surface having a profile similar to CSP 3-4 and exposing upper fascia of concrete aggregate.

2. Bush hammer, needle gun or scabble around all drains, cleanouts, perimeter or any other protrusions then saw cut and bush hammer termination points to provide a key and/or an impact resistant nose.

3. Inaccessible floor areas to large mobile shot blast machine shall be mechanically abraded to the same degree of cleanliness, soundness, and profile using special shot blast edging equipment, needle guns, scabblers or bush hammers.

4. Grinding of the substrate/concrete as a primary surface preparation method is not allowed. Areas that are ground must still be shot blast, needle gunned or bush hammered.

Page 93: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Resinous Flooring The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 097000 - 5

5. After surface preparation is complete, remove by vacuum, or other suitable means all traces or accumulations of dust, spent abrasives, laitance, removed sealer or toppings and other debris.

6. Conduct primer cure test 7. Conduct bond tests. 8. The application of specified coating system must commence prior to any water or other

contamination of the prepared surface.

C. Tent the work area with temporary partition of plastic sheeting to help contain dust, debris and odor during the application as best allowed by the work area.

D. Setup and maintain ventilation system and temporary duct work to vent odor to the outside of the building.

E. Shut down or deactivate building HVAC system in areas that work is to be performed, if required.

F. Maintain venting system for two (2) hours after the final topcoat is applied.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Seamless Flooring Installation: Finished floor system shall be uniform in color, texture and appearance.

1. Prime test for contaminants before commencing priming, cure time must be 45 minutes or less.

a. Apply primer with medium nap 9”- 30” rollers at rate of 100 square feet per gallon (25% Primer Additive). Any areas which have soaked in and do not have glossy appearance must be re-primed.

b. Flood primer into hairline cracks. c. Fill larger cracks or day joints with Flexible Resin prior to application of body coat. d. If the concrete has any larger or moving cracks, fiberglass matting will be required.

The cold joints should be honored and cut after the installation then filled with pigmented Acrylicon Flexible.

2. If the concrete requires sloping or pitching to drains and or patching/repair, only the use of the AC Leveling Screed or AC Industry System will be allowed.

3. Body Coat: Gauge rake body coat at rate recommended by manufacturer and at thickness specified.

4. Colored Flake: Mixed in mechanical mixer and then cast into body coat in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

5. Top Coat (s): Install top coat (s) at the rate of approximately 100 sq. ft. per gallon per application. Topcoats will be heavily sanded at each layer to ensure flatness.

6. Material Systems Time Limitations:

a. Pot Life at 68 degrees F 10-15 minutes b. Cure Time at 68 degrees F 60 minutes c. Recoat Time at 68 degrees F 60-90 minutes

B. Cure Time: Cure coating for two hours at 68 degrees F after application of final roller coat in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Protect from any aggressive chemicals for 24 hours after final seal coat.

Page 94: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Resinous Flooring The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 097000 - 6

C. Temperature of the air and substrate can not exceed 75 degrees F at any time during the installation. The optimal temerature range for installation is between 50-70 degrees F.

D. Edge Termination: Edges that terminate at walls, floor junctures and other embedded items shall be neat and clean, uniform and cosmetically acceptable with no excessively thick or ragged edges.

E. Detail work around drains and other fixed objects shall be done in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Provide manufacturer’s field service consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visit for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Record of inspection by manufacturer’s representative with comments shall be provided to Construction Manager.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protection: The General Contractor/Owner shall protect the AcryliCon system from damage by other trades.

3.7 CLEANING AND HANDOVER

A. General Contractor’s Responsibility:

1. Repair or replace any damaged flooring caused by other trades. 2. Remove material splatters and other surface materials defects caused by other trades. 3. Remove all temporary coverings and protection of floor surface. 4. Remove all construction debris created from the site. 5. Cleaning of all installed floor systems will be in accordance with AcryliCon’s instructions

prior to handover to the client’s representative. 6. Cleaning - Water temperatures can not exceed 145 degrees F.

END OF SECTION 097000

Page 95: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Sound-Absorbing Wall Units The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 098433 - 1

SECTION 098433 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes shop-fabricated, fabric-wrapped panel units tested for acoustical performance, including:

1. Sound-absorbing wall panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

B. SAA: Sound Absorption Average.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of fabric facing, panel edge, core material, and mounting indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For sound-absorbing wall units. Include mounting devices and details; details at panel head, base, joints, and corners; and details at ceiling, floor base, and wall intersections. Indicate panel edge and core materials.

1. Include elevations showing panel sizes and direction of fabric weave and pattern matching.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fabric facing from sound-absorbing wall unit manufacturer's full range.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Fabric: Full-width by approximately 36-inch- (900-mm-) long Sample, but not smaller than required to show complete pattern repeat, from dye lot to be used for the Work, and with specified treatments applied. Mark top and face of fabric.

Page 96: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Sound-Absorbing Wall Units The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 098433 - 2

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Elevations and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Electrical outlets, switches, and thermostats. 2. Items penetrating or covered by sound-absorbing wall units including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Alarms. e. Sprinklers. f. Access panels.

3. Show operation of hinged and sliding components covered by or adjacent to sound-absorbing wall units.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of sound-absorbing wall unit, from manufacturer.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For sound-absorbing wall units to include in maintenance manuals. Include fabric manufacturers' written cleaning and stain-removal recommendations.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials from same production run that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Additional panels and mounting devices.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain sound-absorbing wall units from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide sound-absorbing wall units meeting the following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing per ASTM E 84.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

2. Fire Growth Contribution: Meeting acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 265 or NFPA 286.

Page 97: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Sound-Absorbing Wall Units The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 098433 - 3

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with fabric and sound-absorbing wall unit manufacturers' written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and handling.

B. Deliver materials and units in unopened bundles and store in a temperature-controlled dry place with adequate air circulation.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install sound-absorbing wall units until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work at and above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Lighting: Do not install sound-absorbing wall units until a permanent level of lighting is provided on surfaces to receive the units.

C. Air-Quality Limitations: Protect sound-absorbing wall units from exposure to airborne odors, such as tobacco smoke, and install units under conditions free from odor contamination of ambient air.

D. Field Measurements: Verify locations of sound-absorbing wall units and actual dimensions of openings and penetrations by field measurements before fabrication.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sound-absorbing wall units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Acoustical performance. b. Fabric sagging, distorting, or releasing from panel edge. c. Warping of core.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS

A. Sound-Absorbing Wall Panel.

1. Basis-of-Design Product:

a. Armstrong Sound Soak 6Ø-FR7Ø1

Page 98: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Sound-Absorbing Wall Units The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 098433 - 4

2. Mounting: Back mounted with manufacturer's standard metal clips or bar hangers, secured to substrate.

3. Core: Manufacturer's standard mineral-fiber board. 4. Edge Profile: Square. 5. Corner Detail in Elevation: Square with continuous edge profile indicated. 6. Acoustical Performance: Sound absorption NRC of not less than 0.65 according to

ASTM C 423 for Type A mounting according to ASTM E 795. 7. Nominal Overall Panel Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 8. Panel Width: 30 inches (762 mm). 9. Panel Height: 72 inches (1829 mm).

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Core Materials: Manufacturer's standard.

B. Facing Material: Fabric from same dye lot; color and pattern as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Mounting Devices: Concealed on back of unit, recommended by manufacturer to support weight of unit, and as follows:

1. Metal Clips or Bar Hangers: Manufacturer's standard two-part metal "Z" clips, with one part of each clip mechanically attached to back of unit and the other part to substrate, designed to permit unit removal.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Use manufacturer's standard construction except as otherwise indicated; with facing material applied to face, edges, and back border of dimensionally stable core; and with rigid edges to reinforce panel perimeter against warpage and damage.

B. Core-Face Layer: Evenly stretched over core face and edges and securely attached to core; free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, or sags.

C. Facing Material: Apply fabric facing fully covering visible surfaces of unit; with material stretched straight, on the grain, tight, square, and free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive, or other visible distortions or foreign matter.

D. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) for the following:

1. Thickness. 2. Edge straightness. 3. Overall length and width. 4. Squareness from corner to corner. 5. Chords, radii, and diameters.

Page 99: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Sound-Absorbing Wall Units The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 098433 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fabric, fabricated units, substrates, areas, and conditions, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of sound-absorbing wall units.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sound-absorbing wall units in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other units, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations.

B. Comply with sound-absorbing wall unit manufacturer's written instructions for installation of units using type of mounting devices indicated. Mount units securely to supporting substrate.

C. Align and level fabric pattern and grain among adjacent units.

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

B. Variation of Panel Joints from Hairline: Not more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) wide.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials.

B. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 098433

Page 100: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

IM Building Addition & Renovation 10 14 00 - 1GRAPHICS

SECTION 101400 GRAPHICS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Provide all material, labor and engineering services required to fabricate and install graphics

indicated. 2. Coordinate signage installation with the overall construction schedule. Completion of certain

areas of the building will require installation to occur at different times. Where on-site lifting and hoisting equipment is required to install signage and graphics, coordinate use of equipment with General Contractor. Provide lifting and hoisting equipment when they are not available from the General Contractor. Contractor to provide corner guards per Specification Section 102600 “Wall and Door Protection.”

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Graphics installation shall comply with applicable provisions of the latest edition of the following standards, and with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction:

1. ADAAG– Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; US Architectural and

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board. 2. International Code Council/American National Standards Institute A117.1-Standard on

Accessible and Usable Buildings Facilities. 3. National Fire Protection Association 101 Life Safety Code.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's Product Data, where applicable, and complete drawings showing all identifying devices and graphics and installation details in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 01 requirements.

B. Strike Offs and Mockups

1. Strike offs should be provided for each type of environmental graphic and for the full range of color, texture, and material indicated. Strike off to be printed to scale and at least 24W” x 48H.”

Page 101: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Graphics The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 101400 - 2

2. Mockups of each material affixed to each of the differing substrates shall be provided for

Architect/Owner’s approval. 3. Strike offs shall be provided for every supergraphic in size and format indicated above. 4. Strike off must be applied as a quality standard for dimensional lettering.

C. Graphics Schedule. Final schedule must be approved by Owner prior to fabrication. Submittal to Owner should be made through the Architect.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: All units are to be custom fabricated; manufacturer's products meeting the specifications will be acceptable. Manufacturers must be regularly engaged in fabrication and installation of graphics similar to those indicated.

1. Fabricators shall make at least one visit to the site before production begins to review all graphic locations and installation conditions with Architect and Owner's representative.

2. Fabricators must review all dimensional changes with Architect. 3. Fabricators will be responsible to do field verifications for all areas where graphics will

be installed. Should the field verifications not match the plans/drawings, this must be brought to the architect’s attention immediately.

B. Installer: Company regularly engaged in the installation of custom graphics of this scope and magnitude for a minimum 5 years. Company must provide references and locations of installed work with similar scope and magnitude for review by Owner and Architect.

C. Approvals: All graphics to be approved at the fabricator's shop by the Architect prior to shipment and installation.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of graphic or graphic materials from a single source for that item

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original shipping cartons with seals unbroken.

B. Protect graphic materials from physical damage.

C. Protect all building materials and surfaces from physical damage.

D. Store materials in clean, dry area.

E. Inspect all materials prior to installation to assure proper function and condition of all items

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers for each type of graphic are listed with the specific item below.

Page 102: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Graphics The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 101400 - 3

B. In some instances items have been designed around a specific manufacturer; in other cases multiple manufacturers are listed with a Basis of Design identified. Graphic items and materials from these manufacturers will be acceptable contingent upon their meeting the design, appearance and functional standards established by the specified items. If items or a material of an acceptable manufacturer requires changes from what is indicated on the drawings, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor requiring such change, to pay all costs involved with no additional costs to the Owner

1. Manufacturers not listed in the specifications must be submitted to the Architect for review in a timely manner. If acceptable, these manufacturers and products will be approved by Addendum.

2.2 GRAPHICS – MATERIALS/DESCRIPTIONS

A. Supergraphic Wallcovering

1. Material: Polymeric calendared or cast adhesive backed vinyl, 54” wide; 3 mil or greater thickness and rated for painted finished wall substrate or other painted smooth indoor surfaces. Graphic images as provided by others to be applied to the vinyl using an eco-solvent ink, full color, direct print process. Matte finish, heat applied overlaminate to match manufacturer specifications.

2. Approved Vinyl Manufacturers: 3M Corporation; Mactac, Avery

B. Matte Vinyl Light control/Diffuser Films

1. Material/Description of translucent vinyl:

a. Face: 2.1 mil cast film b. Adhesive: Clear Permanent Acrylic c. Liner: 78# Kraft d. Dimensional Stability: <..0015” e. ASTM E84 Class I or A rating f. Must have a warranty of at least five years g. Cuts must be made with thermal die cutting, flat bed sign-cut, drum roller sign-

cut, or steel rule die-cutting.

2. Approved Vinyl Manufactures: 3M CORPORATION; MACTAC, AVERY 3. Apply vinyl light control and diffuser films to the surface that is least exposed to traffic.

Verify location with architect/owner prior to installation.

C. Backpainted Acrylic Dimensional Letters

1. Heights, Widths, Thicknesses, Font Style, and Finishes: As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Fabrication: Cut pattern using water jet, laser or similar methods to produce clean lines,

corners and radii. 3. Shop Painted Finish: Custom color as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Banners

1. Material: 16 oz blockout solvent printable banner; double sided with block- out layer.

a. Tensile Strength: 173 lbs x 149 lbs b. Tear Resistance: 58 lbs x 61 lbs c. Finish: Matte

Page 103: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Graphics The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 101400 - 4

d. Pole Pockets: Mount top and bottom using pole pockets three times the diameter of the mounting bracket. Pole pockets should be sewn with a 1” double stitch.

e. Ink: must be resistant to fading due to direct sunlight

E. Banner Brackets: Requires two arm assemblies consisting of tube steel continuously welded to mounting plate per banner to be attached at the top and bottom.

1. Mounting: Wall; fits flat surfaces 2. Color: Bracket is custom color as provided by the architect 3. Material: Powder coated steel in thickness required for banner size and loads. 4. Attachments: As recommended per size and loads. Match finish of bracket. 5. Manufacturer: BANNERMAN Arm Assembly AAS8X8G-1.25X38 or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the substrates and conditions under which the work is to be performed, and notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning work indicates acceptance of substrate.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate graphics where indicated using mounting methods in compliance with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations.

1. Co-ordinate installation schedules with the Owner and Architect. 2. Installation shall be performed by personnel experienced in the required methods and

procedures. 3. Submit CAD generated location plan noting the location of all graphics, cross

referenced to drawings for architect’s approval. 4. Conduct a pre-installation survey prior to manufacturing to verify compliance with

project scope. Use full scale mock-up renderings to assist in graphic locations and spacing.

B. Install items level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

C. Install manufactured graphics in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. After installation, clean soiled graphic surfaces according to material manufacturer’s or graphic manufacturer’s written instructions. Protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.

END OF SECTION 101400

Page 104: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Dimensional Letter Signage The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 101419 - 1

SECTION 101419 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Cast dimensional characters. 2. Illuminated, fabricated channel dimensional characters.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Illuminated: Illuminated by lighting source integrally constructed as part of the sign unit.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Furnish templates for placement of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For dimensional letter signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by

others, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at least half

size. 4. Show locations of electrical service connections. 5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish.

1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows:

1. Dimensional Characters: Full-size Sample of each type of dimensional character.

Page 105: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Dimensional Letter Signage The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 101419 - 2

2. Exposed Accessories: Full-size Sample of each accessory type.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For signs indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Include structural analysis calculations for signs indicated to comply with design loads; signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Thermal Movements: For exterior fabricated channel dimensional characters, allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

Page 106: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Dimensional Letter Signage The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 101419 - 3

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS

A. Cast Characters (Interior): Characters with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, and as follows:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. A. R. K. Ramos Signage Systems. b. Gemini Incorporated. c. Metal Arts; Division of L & H Mfg. Co.

2. Character Material: Cast aluminum. 3. Character Height: As indicated. 4. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of character. 5. Finishes:

a. Integral Metal Finish: As selected by Architect from full range of industry finishes. b. Integral Aluminum Finish: Anodized color as selected by Architect from full range

of industry colors and color densities. c. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's custom color matching

owner’s sample. d. Overcoat: Manufacturer's standard baked-on clear coating.

6. Mounting: Standoff hardware. 7. Typeface: Match owner’s logo sample.

B. Fabricated Channel Characters: Metal face and side returns, formed free from warp and distortion; with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; internally braced for stability and for securing fasteners; and as follows.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. A. R. K. Ramos Signage Systems. b. Gemini Incorporated. c. Metal Arts; Division of L & H Mfg. Co.

2. Illuminated Characters: Backlighted character construction with LED lighting including transformers, insulators, and other accessories for operability, with provision for servicing and concealing connections to building electrical system. Use tight or sealed joint construction to prevent unintentional light leakage. Space lamps apart from each other and away from character surfaces as needed to illuminate evenly.

a. Power: 120 V, 60 Hz, 1 phase, 15 A. b. Weeps: Provide weep holes to drain water at lowest part of exterior

characters. Equip weeps with permanent baffles to block light leakage without inhibiting drainage.

Page 107: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Dimensional Letter Signage The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 101419 - 4

3. Character Material: Sheet or plate aluminum. 4. Material Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size and design of character. 5. Translucent Face Sheet: Acrylic sheet, manufacturer's standard thickness for size of

character, and with integral color matching Owner's sample. 6. Character Height: As indicated. 7. Finishes:

a. Integral Metal Finish: As selected by Architect from full range of industry finishes. b. Integral Aluminum Finish: Anodized color as selected by Architect from full range

of industry colors and color densities. c. Integral Stainless-Steel Finish: As selected by Architect from full range of industry

finishes. d. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, in color matching

Owner's sample. e. Overcoat: Manufacturer's standard baked-on clear coating.

8. Mounting: Manufacturer's standard for size and design of character.

a. Hold characters at manufacturer's recommended distance from wall surface.

9. Typeface: Match Owner’s logo requirements.

2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTER MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for type of use and finish indicated.

B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.

C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.

D. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF (UV filtering).

E. Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended by manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant for colors and exposure indicated.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:

1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish nonferrous-metal, stainless-steel or hot-dip galvanized

devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General:

a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise indicated.

Page 108: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Dimensional Letter Signage The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 101419 - 5

b. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use flathead screws and bolts with tamper-resistant Allen-head slots unless otherwise indicated.

4. Sign Mounting Fasteners:

a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Projecting Studs: Threaded studs with sleeve spacer, welded or brazed to back of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Adhesives: As recommended by sign manufacturer and with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less for adhesives used inside the weatherproofing system and applied on-site when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly.

2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention.

3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.

4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous.

5. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners. 6. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to

existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.

7. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks before finishing.

B. Brackets: Fabricate brackets, fittings, and hardware for bracket-mounted signs to suit sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Modify manufacturer's standard brackets as required.

1. Aluminum Brackets: Factory finish brackets with baked-enamel or powder-coat finish to match sign-background color unless otherwise indicated.

Page 109: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Dimensional Letter Signage The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 101419 - 6

2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated.

D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

B. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work.

B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

C. Verify that electrical service is correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation.

Page 110: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Dimensional Letter Signage The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 101419 - 7

3. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

B. Mounting Methods:

1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

2. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and push until spacers are pinched between sign and substrate, embedding the stud ends in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with spacers pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and nuts on stud ends projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

3. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as template. Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install through fasteners and tighten.

4. Back Bar and Brackets: Remove loose debris from substrate surface and install backbar or bracket supports in position so that signage is correctly located and aligned.

5. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage adhesive. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

6. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage tape adhesive.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed characters and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace characters with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

Page 111: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Dimensional Letter Signage The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 101419 - 8

C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.

END OF SECTION 101419

Page 112: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Panel Signage The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 101423 - 1

SECTION 101423 PANEL SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Panel signs. 2. Room-identification signs. 3. Field-applied, vinyl-character signs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by

others, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille,

and layout for each sign at least half size.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish.

1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the required finishes for verification of materials, color, pattern, overall quality, and for adherence to drawings and requirements indicated, in manufacturer’s standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows:

1. Panel Signs: Not less than 12 inches (300 mm) square, including corner. 2. Room-Identification Signs: Full-size Sample.

E. Sign Schedule: In manufacturer’s format for verification of text/copy. Use same designations specified or indicated on Architectural Drawings.

Page 113: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Panel Signage The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 101423 - 2

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

1.8 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Bidder must obtain prior approval from Architect and/or Owner to bid alternates or substitutions to the specifications.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image.

2. Warranty Period: Minimum five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for signs.

Page 114: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Panel Signage The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 101423 - 3

2.2 SIGNS

A. Manufacturers: Signage shall be Vivid as manufactured by Takeform, or Architect approved equal.

1. Cohesive Design: All signs, including work station and room identification, overheads and flag mounts, directional and directories shall have a matching appearance and shall be constructed utilizing the same manufacturing process to assure a consistent look throughout.

B. Panel Sign and Room-Identification Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:

1. Solid-Sheet Sign: Acrylic sheet with finish specified in "Surface Finish and Applied Graphics" Subparagraph below and as follows:

a. Thickness: 0.375 inch, comprised of two layers. b. Graphics: Direct print acrylic sign system with applied graphics.

2. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.

a. Edge Condition: Square cut. b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Square.

3. Mounting: Surface mounted to wall using manufacturer’s standard method for substrates indicated.

4. Surface Finish and Applied Graphics:

a. Integral Acrylic Sheet Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

b. Surface Finish: Non-glare, optically clear with a P-99 finish assuring no loss of clarity or composition of the print.

c. Subsurface Graphics:

1) Direct print or applied vinyl graphics. Signage shall be capable of accepting direct prints including colors, patterns, graphic images and photography. Prints shall be on second surface to protect from scratches, fading or other damage. A top-side print shall not be accepted.

2) Slide-in changeable insert, where indicated on Drawings.

5. Tactile and Braille Text and Typeface: Manufacturer’s standard process for producing text and symbols complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A177.1. Accessible raised characters shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille and variable content as scheduled. Finish raised characters to contrast with background color, and finish Braille to match background color. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape. a. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch, matte PETG, and subsurface-

colored for scratch resistance. b. Typeface: As indicated. Characters shall be uppercase, Helvetica Medium,

Helvetica Bold and Helvetica Bold Condensed. Characters shall be sans serif. Characters shall not be italic, oblique, script, highly decorative, or of other unusual forms.

c. Character Height: Minimum 5/8 inch high, Maximum 2 inches.

Page 115: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Panel Signage The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 101423 - 4

6. Insert Panel: Sign panel shall be capable of accepting paper or acetate inserts to allow changing and updating as required. Manufacturer shall provide a template containing layout, font, color, artwork, and trim lines to allow Owner to produce inserts on laser or ink jet printer. The template shall be Acrobat or Word format.

a. Acrylic Window Thickness: 0.040 inch thick b. Acrylic Window Finish: Non-glare.

7. Adhesive: Pressure activated; shall be nonhazardous and shall allow for flexing and deflection of the adhered components due to changes in temperature and moisture without bond failure.

8. Flatness Tolerance: Sign panel shall remain flat or uniformly curved under installed conditions as indicated and within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) measured diagonally from corner to corner.

2.3 FIELD-APPLIED, VINYL-CHARACTER SIGNS

A. Field-Applied, Vinyl-Character Sign: Prespaced characters die cut from 3- to 3.5-mil (0.076- to 0.089-mm) thick, weather-resistant vinyl film with release liner on the back and carrier film on the front for on-site alignment and application.

1. Size: As indicated. 2. Finish: Frosted. 3. Substrate: Glass. 4. Application: Front adhesive, adhered to reverse side of glass.

2.4 PANEL-SIGN MATERIALS

A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF (UV filtering).

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:

1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated on Drawings to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless-steel devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Inserts: Furnish inserts to be set by other trades into concrete or masonry work.

B. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch (1.14 mm) thick, with adhesive on both sides.

C. Shim Plate: Manufacturer’s standard shim to lift the sign off the wall to facilitate cleaning and painting without sign removal.

D. Backer Plate: Manufacturer’s standard, as required, to be placed on the opposite side of glass to cover tape and adhesive of glass-mounted signs. The backer shall be the same size and shape of the sign.

Page 116: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Panel Signage The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 101423 - 5

2.6 GRAPHICS

A. Image Files: provided by Architect with a minimum resolution of 300 dpi.

B. Colors, Patterns, and Artwork: Face and backgrounds colors per the Drawings.

C. Arrows, Symbols, and Logo Art: To be provided in style, sizes, colors, and spacing as shown on the Drawings.

D. Message Background: See Drawings.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly.

2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention.

3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.

4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous.

5. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners.

B. Signs with Changeable Message Capability: Fabricate signs to allow insertion of changeable messages as follows:

1. For slide-in changeable inserts, fabricate slot without burrs or constrictions that inhibit function. Furnish initial changeable insert. Furnish two blank inserts for each sign for Owner's use.

2. For frame to hold changeable sign panel, fabricate frame without burrs or constrictions that inhibit function. Furnish initial sign panel. Subsequent changeable sign panels are by Owner.

2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated.

Page 117: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Panel Signage The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 101423 - 6

D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, PROTECTION

A. Package to prevent damage or deterioration during shipment, handling, storage, and installation. Products should remain in original packaging until removal is necessary. Store products in a dry, indoor location.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work.

B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

C. Verify that anchor inserts are correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that

would impair installation.

B. Room-Identification Signs and Other Accessible Signage: Install in locations on walls as indicated and according to accessibility standard.

C. Mounting Methods:

1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

Page 118: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Panel Signage The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 101423 - 7

2. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and push until spacers are pinched between sign and substrate, embedding the stud ends in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with spacers pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and nuts on stud ends projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

3. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage tape adhesive.

4. Shim-Plate Mounting: Provide manufacturer’s standard concealed shim with predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other direct mounting methods are impractical. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate. Attach signs to plate using method specified above.

D. Panel Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide opaque sheet matching sign material and finish onto opposite side of glass to conceal back of sign.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.

END OF SECTION 101423

Page 119: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

 

Page 120: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Toilet Compartments The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102113 - 1

SECTION 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide phenolic toilet partitions and urinal screens with related components and accessories for complete installations.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 102813 "Toilet Accessories".

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01 33 23. Include the following:

1. Manufacturers product data. 2. Plans, elevations, details of construction, sizes of openings, anchoring devices,

leveling details, hardware fittings, and fastenings

B. Color Selector: Complete range of manufacturer's colors.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Take field measurements prior to fabrication to assure proper fitting.

B. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices.

C. Installer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years continuous experience installing toilet compartments on projects of equivalent size, quantity and complexity.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to ANSI A117.1 code for access for the handicapped operation of toilet compartment door and hardware.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver items in manufacturer's original unopened protective packaging. Store materials in original packaging to prevent soiling, physical damage or wetting.

Page 121: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Toilet Compartments The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102113 - 2

B. Handle so as to prevent damage to finish surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Material and products to be manufactured regionally AND harvested, extracted, or recovered regionally within a radius of 500 miles from the project site.

B. Type: Floor anchored, standard height, width as required to fit between walls or as indicated.

C. Materials: Provide manufacturer's standard doors, pilasters and panels fabricated specifically for the partition system.

1. Doors, Pilasters and Panels

a. Cores: Solid phenolic. All edges shall be polished black. b. Face Finish

1) High pressure, matte finish, melamine surface fused to core. 2) Colors: As selected by Architect. As many as 4 colors may be selected on

the project.

2. Recycled Content: Minimum 20 percent pot-consumer recycled content.

D. Components.

1. Doors, Pilasters and Panels

a. Stiles: 1" thick. b. Panels: 1/2" thick. c. Doors: ¾” thick d. Fire Classification: ASTM E84, Class II.

1) Flame Spread: 70. 2) Smoke Density: Under 100.

2. Hinges: Gravity type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 3 hinges per door.

3. Headrail: Aluminum extrusions, anodized with anti-grip configuration; fastened to the pilaster tops.

4. Latch: Minimum 14 gage. Recessed latch unit. Latch units shall have emergency access capability.

a. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.

5. Keeper: Minimum 11 gage. Covers top and bottom of latch when door is in closed/locked position.

Page 122: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Toilet Compartments The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102113 - 3

6. Stops: Minimum 11 gage. 2 required per door. 7. Brackets: U-shaped channels, aluminum, anodized and polished with 3 brackets per

connection 8. Shoes: Nominal 4" high, one piece, stainless steel shoe to conceal leveling device on

stiles. #4 finish. 9. Coat Hook and Bumper: Manufacturer's standard unit, rubber tipped for in- swinging

doors. 10. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out- swinging doors 11. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard at out-swinging doors. 12. Exposed Fasteners: Theft proof, stainless steel, polished finish.

E. Urinal Screen: Provide wall mounted type consisting of screen panel and required fittings and hardware.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Reinforcement

1. Provide threaded steel inserts and reinforcement for installation of hardware, fittings, brackets and accessories specified elsewhere.

2. Where grab bars attach to toilet partitions, reinforce as required to support 300 pounds, minimum.

B. Panels, Doors, Posts and Stiles

1. Provide leveling devices at floor, bolted to panels and concealed with removable shoes as specified below.

2. Ease edges for smooth surface, free of sharp corners.

3. Panels and doors to be approximately 58" high; provide bottom 12" above floor.

2.3 MANUFACTURER

A. Partitions by SPEC-RITE, SANYMETAL, AMPCO, BOBRICK, BRADLEY or ACCURATE are acceptable provided they meet the requirements specified herein.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications.

1. Field verify dimensions. 2. Securely fasten in place, neat, level and plumb. 3. Evidence of drilling, cutting and fitting to room finish shall be concealed in finished work. 4. Adjust doors to swing freely and to remain open approximately 6" when unlatched. 5. Set units with not more than 1/2" between pilasters and panels, and not more than 1"

between panels or doors and walls.

Page 123: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Toilet Compartments The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102113 - 4

6. Adjust bottoms of doors level when doors are in closed position. 7. Clean exposed surfaces and touch-up minor finish imperfections using materials

and methods recommended by partition manufacturer and as acceptable to Architect.

END OF SECTION 102113

Page 124: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Wire Mesh Partitions The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102213 - 1

SECTION 102213 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Standard-duty wire mesh partitions.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for building anchors into concrete construction for wire mesh partitions.

2. Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings" for railing systems requiring wire mesh railing insert panels.

3. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for field painting wire mesh items. 4. Section 323113 "Chain Link Fences and Gates" for chain-link fencing.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. As defined in ASTM E 2016:

1. Intermediate Crimp: Wires pass over one and under the next adjacent wire in both directions, with wires crimped before weaving and with extra crimps between the intersections.

2. Lock Crimp: Deep crimps at points of the intersection that lock wires securely in place.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for wire mesh items.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include clearances required for operation of doors.

C. Setting Drawings: For anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

Page 125: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Wire Mesh Partitions The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102213 - 2

E. Samples for Verification: 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) panel constructed of specified frame members and wire mesh. Show method of finishing members at intersections.

F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For wire mesh units indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Welding certificates.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For wire mesh unit hardware to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

1. Installer's responsibilities include fabricating and installing wire mesh items and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for wire mesh items, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain wire mesh items from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver wire mesh items with cardboard protectors on perimeters of panels and doors and with posts wrapped to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Use vented plastic.

B. Inventory wire mesh partition door hardware on receipt and provide secure lockup for wire mesh partition door hardware delivered to Project site.

1. Tag each item or package separately with identification and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with wire mesh units by field measurements before fabrication.

Page 126: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Wire Mesh Partitions The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102213 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Donaldson, R. J., Inc. 2. Folding Guard Corporation. 3. G-S Company (The).

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Wire: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).

B. Steel Plates, Channels, Angles, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40 unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads.

E. Square Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed structural-steel tubing.

F. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with G60 (Z180) zinc (galvanized) or A60 (ZF180) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating designation.

G. Panel-to-Panel Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard steel bolts, nuts, and washers.

H. Postinstalled Expansion Anchors: With capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Carbon Steel: Zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild).

2. For Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to four times the loads imposed.

I. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated and fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials; with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by wire mesh construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

J. Seismic Bracing: Angles with legs not less than 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) wide, formed from 0.04-inch- (1-mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel sheet; with bolted connections and 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter bolts.

K. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099123 "Interior Painting”.

L. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer, complying with MPI#79.

Page 127: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Wire Mesh Partitions The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102213 - 4

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

M. Zinc-Rich Primer: Compatible with topcoat, complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29.

N. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

2.3 STANDARD-DUTY WIRE MESH PARTITIONS

A. Mesh: 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter, intermediate-crimp steel wire woven into 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) diamond mesh.

B. Horizontal and Vertical Panel Framing: 1-by-1/2-by-1/8-inch (25-by-13-by-3-mm) cold-rolled steel channels.

C. Horizontal Panel Stiffeners: 2 cold-rolled steel channels, not less than 1 by 3/8 by 1/8 inch (25 by 9.5 by 3 mm), bolted or riveted toe to toe through mesh or 1-by-1/2-by-1/8-inch (25-by-13-by-3-mm) cold-rolled steel channels with wire woven through.

D. Top Capping Bars: 2-1/4-by-1-inch (57-by-25-mm) cold-rolled steel channels.

E. Posts for Other-Than-90-Degree Corners: Manufacturer's standard steel pipe or tubing with 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter bolt holes aligning with bolt holes in vertical framing.

1. Partitions up to 12 Feet (3.7 m) High: 1-1/4-inch (32-mm) OD. 2. Partitions up to 20 Feet (6.1 m) High: 2-1/2-inch (65-mm) OD.

F. Line Posts: 3-inch-by-4.1-lb (76-mm-by-1.9-kg) or 3-1/2-by-1-1/4-by-0.127-inch (89-by-32-by-3.2-mm) steel channels; with 5-by-18-by-1/4-inch (125-by-450-by-6-mm) steel base plates punched for attachment to floor.

G. Floor Shoes: Steel, cast iron, or cast aluminum, not less than 2 inches (50 mm) high; sized to suit vertical framing, drilled for attachment to floor, and with set screws for leveling adjustment.

H. Swinging Doors: Fabricated from same mesh as partitions, with framing fabricated from 1-1/4-by-1/2-by-1/8-inch (32-by-13-by-3-mm) steel channels or C-channels, banded with 1-1/4-by-1/8-inch (32-by-3-mm) flat steel bar cover plates on 4 sides, and with 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick angle strike bar and cover on strike jamb.

1. Hinges: Full-surface type, 3-by-3-inch (76-by-76-mm) steel, 1-1/2 pairs per door; bolted, riveted, or welded to door and jamb framing.

2. Cylinder Lock: Mortise type with cylinder specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware". 3. Egress hardware as per manufactures standard recommendations.

I. Accessories:

1. Sheet Metal Base: Not less than 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet. 2. Adjustable Filler Panels: Not less than 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel

sheet; capable of filling openings from 2 to 12 inches (50 to 300 mm). 3. Wall Clips: Manufacturer's standard, cold-rolled steel sheet.

J. Finish for Uncoated Ferrous Steel: Shop primed for field painting unless otherwise indicated.

Page 128: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Wire Mesh Partitions The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102213 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine floors for suitable conditions where wire mesh items will be installed.

C. Examine walls to which wire mesh items will be attached for properly located blocking, grounds, and other solid backing for attachment of support fasteners.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS ERECTION

A. Anchor wire mesh partitions to floor with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter, postinstalled expansion anchors at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through anchor clips located at each post and corner. Shim anchor clips as required to achieve level and plumb installation.

1. Anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor wire mesh partitions to walls at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through back corner panel framing and as follows:

1. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.

2. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads.

C. Secure top capping bars to top framing channels with 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter "U" bolts spaced not more than 28 inches (700 mm) o.c.

D. Provide line posts at locations indicated or, if not indicated, as follows:

1. For partitions that are 7 to 9 feet (2.1 to 2.7 m) high, spaced at 15 to 20 feet (4.6 to 6.1 m) o.c.

2. For partitions that are 10 to 12 feet (3.0 to 3.7 m) high, located between every other panel.

3. For partitions that are more than 12 feet (3.7 m) high, located between each panel.

E. Provide seismic supports and bracing as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer and as required for stability, extending and fastening members to supporting structure.

F. Where standard-width wire mesh partition panels do not fill entire length of run, provide adjustable filler panels to fill openings.

G. Install doors complete with door and egress hardware.

H. Weld or bolt sheet metal bases to wire mesh partitions and doors.

Page 129: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Wire Mesh Partitions The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102213 - 6

I. Bolt accessories to wire mesh partition framing.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. Adjust hardware to function smoothly. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.

B. Remove and replace defective work including doors and framing that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

C. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

END OF SECTION 102213

Page 130: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Operable Partitions The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102226 - 1

SECTION 102226 OPERABLE PARTITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Manually operated, acoustical panel partitions.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach supporting tracks to overhead structural system.

2. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for hardware to the extent not specified in this Section. 3. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sound barrier construction above the ceiling at track.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."

B. NIC: Noise Isolation Class.

C. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

D. STC: Sound Transmission Class.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified testing agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated:

1. Sound-Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested for laboratory sound-transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.

Page 131: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Operable Partitions The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102226 - 2

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data for attachments, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

2. Indicate storage and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing indicated.

1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing indicated, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Textile: Full width by not less than 36-inch- (914-mm-) long section of fabric from dye lot to be used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat.

2. Panel Facing Material: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less than 3 inches (75 mm) square.

3. Panel Edge Material: Not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long. 4. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard exposed door-operating device.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For operable panel partitions indicated to comply with performance requirements, including analysis data and calculations signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 3. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. HVAC ductwork, outlets, and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Smoke detectors. f. Access panels.

4. Plenum acoustical barriers.

B. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work, including support-beam, mounting-hole template.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For operable panel partitions, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

Page 132: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Operable Partitions The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102226 - 3

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of operable panel partition, from manufacturer.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each operable panel partition.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For operable panel partitions to include in maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Panel finish facings and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance.

2. Seals, hardware, track, carriers, and other operating components. 3. Electric operator.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials from the same production run that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Panel Finish-Facing Material: Furnish full width in quantity to cover both sides of two panels when installed.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for testing indicated.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark packages and panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on panels.

Page 133: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Operable Partitions The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102226 - 4

1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of operable panel partition openings by field measurements before fabrication.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Faulty operation of operable panel partitions. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal wear.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Steel Frame: Steel sheet, manufacturer's standard nominal minimum thickness for uncoated steel.

B. Steel Face/Liner Sheets: Tension-leveled steel sheet, manufacturer's standard nominal minimum thickness for uncoated steel.

C. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use, corrosion resistance, and finish indicated; ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) for extrusions; manufacturer's standard strengths and thicknesses for type of use.

1. Frame Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard steel or aluminum.

D. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 36/C 36M.

E. Cement Board: ASTM C 1288.

F. Plywood: DOC PS 1.

G. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

H. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

2.2 OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS

A. Operable Acoustical Panels: Operable acoustical panel partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing, suspension system, operators, and accessories.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product or comparable product by one of the following:

Page 134: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Operable Partitions The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102226 - 5

a. Mult-use A/B – Modern Fold Acoustic – seal encore b. Mult-use D/E – Modern Fold Acoustic – #932

B. Panel Operation: Manually operated, individual and manually operated, paired panels.

C. Panel Construction: Provide top reinforcement as required to support panel from suspension components and provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and finish irregularities.

D. Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements.

1. Panel Width: Equal widths.

E. STC: Not less than 56 (mult-use A/B) or 50 (mult-use D/E)

F. Panel Thickness: Not less than 3 inches (75 mm).

G. Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard.

1. Initial Closure: Manufacturers standard acoustical seal. 2. Final Closure: Constant-force, lever-operated mechanical closure expanding from panel

edge to create a constant-pressure acoustical seal.

H. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and accessories; with decorative, protective finish.

1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Pocket Door: Acoustic seal, type II double door hinged to jamb on each side, closing in

center

2.3 SEALS

A. General: Provide types of seals indicated that produce operable panel partitions complying with acoustical performance requirements and the following:

1. Manufacturer's standard seals. 2. Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage. 3. Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent panels

and between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when operable panel partition is extended and closed.

B. Vertical Seals: Deep-nesting, interlocking steel astragals mounted on each edge of panel, with continuous PVC acoustical seal.

C. Horizontal Top Seals: 1. PVC-faced, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact seal exerting uniform

constant pressure on track when extended.

D. Horizontal Bottom Seals: PVC-faced, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact seal exerting uniform constant pressure on floor when extended, ensuring horizontal and vertical sealing and resisting panel movement.

Page 135: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Operable Partitions The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102226 - 6

1. Mechanically Operated for Acoustical Panels: Extension and retraction of bottom seal by operating handle or built-in operating mechanism, with operating range not less than 2 inches (50 mm) between retracted seal and floor finish.

2.4 FINISH FACING

A. General: Provide finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire-test-response characteristics and that are factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate backing, using mildew-resistant nonstaining adhesive as recommended by facing manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Apply one-piece, seamless facings free of air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects, with edges tightly butted, and with invisible seams complying with Shop Drawings for location, and with no gaps or overlaps. Horizontal butted edges and seams are not permitted. Tightly secure and conceal raw and selvage edges of facing for finished appearance.

2. Where facings with directional or repeating patterns or directional weave are indicated, mark facing top and attach facing in same direction.

3. Match facing pattern 72 inches (1830 mm) above finished floor. 4. Color/Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Fabric Wall Covering: As selected by architect from manufacturer’s full range from same dye lot, treated to resist stains.

C. Cap-Trimmed Edges: Protective perimeter-edge trim with tight hairline joints concealing edges of panel and finish facing, finished as follows:

1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper required to comply with performance requirements; and with manufacturer's standard color anodic finish.

2.5 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Suspension Tracks: Steel or aluminum mounted directly to overhead structural support, with adjustable steel hanger rods for overhead support, designed for type of operation, size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Size track to support partition operation and storage without damage to suspension system, operable panel partitions, or adjacent construction. Limit track deflection to no more than 0.10 inch (2.54 mm) between bracket supports. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage.

B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition and for easy operation; with ball-bearing wheels.

C. Track Intersections, Switches, and Accessories: As required for type of operation, storage, track configuration, and layout indicated for operable panel partitions, and compatible with partition assembly specified. Fabricate track intersections and switches from steel or aluminum.

Page 136: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Operable Partitions The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102226 - 7

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Storage Pocket Door: Full height at end of partition runs to conceal stacked partition; of same materials, finish, construction, thickness, and acoustical qualities as panels; complete with operating hardware and acoustical seals at soffit, floor, and jambs. Hinges in finish to match other exposed hardware.

1. Manufacturer's standard method to secure storage pocket door in closed position. 2. Rim Lock: Key-operated lock cylinder, keyed to master key system, to secure storage

pocket door in closed position. Include two keys per lock.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable panel partitions.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with ASTM E 557 except as otherwise required by operable panel partition manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

C. Install panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings.

D. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable.

E. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not acceptable.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operable panel partitions to operate smoothly, without warping or binding. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

B. Adjust storage pocket doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. Check and readjust operating hardware. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Light-Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical joints and top and bottom seals for voids; adjust partitions for acceptable fit.

Page 137: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Operable Partitions The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102226 - 8

B. NIC Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Testing Methodology: Perform testing of installed operable panel partition for noise isolation according to ASTM E 336, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than NIC indicated. Adjust and fit partitions to comply with NIC test method requirements.

D. Testing Extent: Testing agency shall randomly select one operable panel partition installation(s) for testing.

E. Repair or replace operable panel partitions that do not comply with requirements.

F. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of repaired, replaced, or additional work with specified requirements.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean soiled surfaces of operable panel partitions to remove dust, loose fibers, fingerprints, adhesives, and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions.

END OF SECTION 102226

Page 138: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Wall and Door Protection The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102600 - 1

SECTION 102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Resilient corner guards. 2. Stainless steel corner guards.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1. ASTM E84 – Surface Burnign Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. UL – Underwriters Laboratories Classifications.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer: Firm with minimum five years experience in successfully producing wall guards and wall panels similar to that indicated for this project.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 23.

B. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate the following for each type of wall protector:

1. Type of wall protector identified by manufacturer’s model numbers including profiles, sizes, accessories and finish.

2. Types and sizes of wall anchors for each type of wall construction.

C. Samples: 6” long full size samples representative of each type of wall protector specified.

D. Manufacturer’s certification indicating compliance with ADA Accessibility Guidelines for Protruding Objects.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Products shall be delivered to job-site in original unopened packages bearing manufacturer's labels.

B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

Page 139: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Wall and Door Protection The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102600 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT CORNER GUARDS

A. Description: Surface adhered extruded corner guards.

B. Corner Guard: High-impact vinyl acrylic extrusion, nominal 0.078” thick

1. Fire Rating: Class A 2. Finish: Pebble grain.

C. Wing Width: 1.5”.

D. Angle: 90 degrees.

E. Manufacturer: Type Koroguard G815 by KOROSEAL or equal approved products by CONSTRUCTIOIN SPECIALTIES, INC or BALCO/METALINES.

F. Color: As selected by Architect.

2.2 STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARDS

A. Description: 16 gauge, Type 304, stainless steel with satin finish. Provide with 1/8” radius corner.

B. Wing Width: 2" typical.

C. Angles: As indicated. Custom angles required.

D. Length: From top of base to finish ceiling.

E. Adhesive: Types as recommended by corner guard manufacturer for substrates encountered.

F. Fasteners: Types as recommended by manufacturer for substrates encountered.

G. Manufacturer: KOROSEAL, BUCHANAN COMPANY, GAMCO, PAWLING CORPORATION.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive wall protectors. 2. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

Page 140: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Wall and Door Protection The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102600 - 3

3.2 CLEANING

A. Remove protective material from all wall protectors and clean in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

END OF SECTION 102600

Page 141: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

 

Page 142: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102800 - 1

SECTION 102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section covers all toilet accessories. Extent of each type of accessory is indicated on the drawing and specified herein.

B. Included are accessories for:

1. Toilet rooms. 2. Locker/Shower rooms 3. Janitor rooms. 4. Kitchens, Break Rooms and similar areas with sinks.

C. Coordinate toilet partition mounted items with partition manufacturer for proper fastener reinforcements.

1.3 WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTION

A. Unframed Mirrors: Section 08 81 00.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide each type of products of one manufacturer. Provide locks with same keying for all accessory units in the project.

B. Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of units not permitted.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions for each type of toilet accessory required.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery accessory items in manufacturer's original, unopened packaging.

B. Store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect against soiling, damage and wetting.

Page 143: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102800 - 2

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Furnish anchoring devices and inserts for installation of toilet accessories. Coordinate delivery of items which must be set or built into other work.

B. Provide setting drawings, templates and instructions for installation of anchorage devices.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Submit mirror manufacturer’s written ten year warranty against silver spoilage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Where a manufacturer’s product is specified, equal products as manufactured by BOBRICK, BRADLEY, A & J WASHROOM ACCESSORIES, AMERICAN SPECIALTIES, may be used provided the product meets the requirements of the specifications. Where an item is listed as “ No Substitution”, the specified item must be provided.

2.2 ITEMS

A. Toilet Paper Holder: KIMBERLEY CLARK JRT Junior Twin Jumbo Roll, stainless steel.

B. Handicap Bars: BRADLEY Series 812.

1. Diameter: 1-1/2 inch. 2. Material: Stainless steel, standard satin finish. 3. Fasteners: Concealed. 4. Style and Length: As indicated.

C. Paper Towel Dispenser: KIMBERLEY CLARK K-C Professional Sanitouch Hands-free, stainless steel (preschool hand washing station/trainers/first aid).

D. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: BENNETT 20L.

1. Material: Stainless steel, satin finish.

E. Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser: BRADLEY Model 583.

1. Type: Surface mounted. 2. Description: Stainless steel, hinged, lockable cover. 3. Capacity: 500.

F. Soap Dispenser: KIMBERLEY CLARK Twinpack

G. Mirrors

1. Standard Framed Type: BOBRICK B292 and B290

a. Frame: Stainless steel angle, theft resistant concealed fasteners.

Page 144: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102800 - 3

b. Glass: Tempered 1/4" thick with full silver coating, copper coating and organic coating. Warranted by manufacturer 10 years against silver spoilage.

c. Size: 24" wide x 36" high, unless otherwise indicated or scheduled on the drawings.

H. Mop Strip: BRADLEY Model 9953.

1. Description: Stainless steel, satin finish back plate with three spring activated rubber cam mop holders.

I. Toilet Stall Shelf: BRADLEY Model 755-18

1. Description: 18 gauge stainless steel with exposed surfaces in architectural satin finish. End brackets are integral.

2. Size: 18” L x 5” W.

J. Mop Strip: BRADLEY Model 9953.

1. Description: Stainless steel, satin finish back plate with three spring activated rubber cam mop holders.

K. Shower Curtain and Hooks: BRADLEY Models 9533 and 9536:

1. Provide 6 gauge, 100% vinyl material with hemmed edges and rust proof grommets. Field verify for height and width.

2. Color: White. 3. Provide quantity of hooks as required.

L. Shower Curtain Rod: BRADLEY Model 9539

1. Description: Type 304, 18 gauge stainless steel. 2. Diameter: 1-1/4". 3. Length: Field verify. 4. Provide with mounting flanges and escutcheons.

M. Shower/Drying Seat: BRADLEY Model 9563/9564.

1. Description: Folding type. Right or left hand as indicated or as required for field conditions.

2. Frame: Stainless steel tubing, type 304, 18 gauge. 3. Seat: Solid phenolic; color as selected by Architect.

N. Electric Hand Dryer: XLERATOR Model XL-GR.

1. Type: Surface Mount. 2. Electrical: 115V, 20 amp, 1/10 hp, UL approved. 3. Time Cycle: 30 seconds. 4. Finish: Baked enamel. Color as selected by Architect. 5. Warranty: 10 years.

O. Janitor Closet Shelves: BRADLEY Model 7512

1. Type: Surface mounted. 2. Material: Stainless steel, satin finish. 3. Length: 24”.

Page 145: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102800 - 4

4. Depth: 12”.

P. Infant Changing Table

1. Description: Surface mount, fold down type. Horizontal stainless steel changing surface with safety strap. Folds up flat against wall when not in use. Provide with integral sanitary liner holder. a. Sanitary Liners: Provide 2 cases (approximately 2,800) disposable liners.

2. Manufacturer Koala Bear Kare Horizontal Baby Changing Station by KOALA CORPORATION or equal by BROCAR PRODUCTS or FOUR D, INC.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Edges: All throat openings and similar type exposed edges of towel dispensers, seat cover dispensers, waste receptacles and similar type accessories to be hemmed or sufficiently rounded to preclude accidental cuts to users.

B. Miters: Provide one-piece seamless beveled or return flange; open miters, if not welded, must be worked to eliminate sharp edges; edges which may cut or snag are not acceptable.

2.4 SCHEDULE OF ACCESSORIES

A. Location, quantity and mounting height of accessories as indicated on drawings.

B. Keyed Units: Key all similar types of units alike. Provide two keys per unit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Installer: Examine substrates, previously installed inserts anchorages necessary for mounting of accessories and other conditions under which installation is to occur.

1. Notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and time completion of the work.

2. Do not proceed with work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using fasteners which are appropriate for substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units and plumb and level, firmly anchored in positions indicated.

B. Provide concealed fasteners wherever possible of types required for substrate conditions encountered.

1. Metal Stud and Gypsum Board: Screws or bolts anchored to 16 gage (minimum) metal plate blocking or wood blocking located within stud space. See Section 09 21 16 or 06 10 50.

2. Concrete Masonry Units: Integral fasteners (i.e. expansion anchors, etc.).

Page 146: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 102800 - 5

3. Metal Lath and Plaster and Studs: Toggle bolts.

C. Lead, plastic or fiber plugs are not acceptable.

D. Grab Bars: Coordinate grab bar locations as to right hand or left hand installations with field conditions.

1. Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F446.

E. Upon completion of installation, adjust each accessory unit for proper operation and clean exposed surfaces. Turn over keys to designated Owner's personnel.

END OF SECTION 102800

Page 147: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

 

Page 148: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Fire Extinguisher Cabinets The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 10 44 13

1 of 5

SECTION 10 44 13 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Fire protection cabinets for the following:

a. Portable fire extinguishers.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 10 14 00 "Signage" for directional signage to out-of-sight fire extinguishers and cabinets.

2. Section 10 44 16 "Fire Extinguishers."

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets.

1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fire protection cabinet indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Size: 6 by 6 inches square.

E. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet schedule with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.

Page 149: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Fire Extinguisher Cabinets The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 10 44 13

2 of 5

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

C. Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick.

D. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), .090 mm thick min, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished).

2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group;. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company;. c. Potter Roemer LLC;. d. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc.;.

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.

C. Cabinet Material: Stainless-steel sheet.

1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.

D. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation.

1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth.

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Stainless-steel sheet.

Page 150: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Fire Extinguisher Cabinets The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 10 44 13

3 of 5

F. Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet.

G. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame.

H. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet.

1. Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet.

I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Provide standard Stainless Steel, projecting lever handle. 2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180

degrees.

J. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle.

3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."

1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 2) Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Black. 4) Orientation: Vertical.

4. Surface Mounted Fire Extinguisher Locator signs: 4" Projection, 5.5" X 10" or approved substitution. Provide one sign for each Fire Extinguisher Cabinet.

K. Finishes:

1. Stainless Steel: No. 4.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 4. Install door locks at factory.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick.

Page 151: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Fire Extinguisher Cabinets The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 10 44 13

4 of 5

2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged. 3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.

2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.5 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.

1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. 2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign

matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 3. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for hose and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections before cabinet installation.

B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed cabinets will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare recesses for recessed and semirecessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

Page 152: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Fire Extinguisher Cabinets The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 10 44 13

5 of 5

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated on drawings or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide semirecessed fire protection cabinets. 2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. 3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb.

C. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION

Page 153: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

 

Page 154: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Fire Extinguishers The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 10 44 16

1 of 3

SECTION 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 10 44 13 "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets."

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets.

B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher schedule with fire protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

Page 155: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Fire Extinguishers The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 10 44 16

2 of 3

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Amerex Corporation. b. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. d. Potter Roemer LLC.

2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,

Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.

B. Wet-Chemical Type: UL-rated 2-A:1-B:C:K, 1.6-gal. nominal capacity, with potassium acetate-based chemical in stainless-steel container; with pressure-indicating gage. (Located in Apartment Kitchen, Room G19b)

C. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.

2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS - When no cabinet is indicated on the Drawings

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

a. Orientation: Vertical.

Page 156: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Fire Extinguishers The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 10 44 16

3 of 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.

B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.

END OF SECTION

Page 157: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

 

Page 158: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Plastic-Laminate-Clad Lockers The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 064116 - 1

SECTION 101523 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD LOCKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets. 2. Accessories Common to lockers.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator qualifications: A firm specializing in the fabrication of plastic-clad-laminate lockers with a satisfactory record of performance on projects of comparable size and quality. Fabricator shall be acceptable to the Architect.

B. Installation: Performed only by experienced skilled finish carpenters.

C. Catalog Standards

1. Manufacturer's catalog numbers, where shown, are for convenience in identifying locker work.

2. Use of a specific manufacturer's catalog numbers is not to preclude the use of any other acceptable manufacturer's product or procedures that may be equivalent.

D. Reference Standards: Wherever the following abbreviations are used herein, they shall refer to the corresponding standard:

1. ANSI: American National Standards Institute. 2. AWI: Architectural Woodwork Institute. 3. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturer's Association. 4. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials. 5. CS: Commercial Standard.

E. Quality Grade: Materials and fabrication shall be "custom grade" in accordance with "Quality Standard Illustrated," of the AWI conforming to the following sections:

1. Section 200: Plywood and particleboard.

Page 159: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Plastic-Laminate-Clad Lockers The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 064116 - 2

2. Section 400: Casework.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's/fabricator's data and installation instructions for each type of locker.

B. Samples: Submit samples of specified finishes.

C. Shop Drawings

1. Submit shop drawings for lockers showing plans, elevations, ends and cross sections. 2. Show details and location of anchorages and fitting to floors, walls and base. 3. Include layout of units with relation to surrounding walls, doors, windows and other

building components. 4. Provide 1% of lockers meeting ANSI accessibility standards, located in lower tier, with

accessible hardware (12” – 40” A.F.F), and shelf (15” A.F.F).

D. Special Environmental Requirements

1. Submit product data documentation indicating urea formaldehyde free content for each composite wood product/system.

2. Submit product documentation for Sealant and Adhesives, documentation indicating VOC Content

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect casework during delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.

B. Do not deliver casework until concrete, masonry and other similar wet work has been completed and is thoroughly dry, outside door openings are permanently watertight, exterior windows are glazed and, in case of temperature dropping below 60 degrees F., until temporary heating and ventilating systems are in operation.

C. Store casework in dry, well-ventilated spaces with constant minimum temperature of 60 degrees F., and maximum relative humidity of 55%.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Provide and maintain a constant temperature and humidity before, during and after installation as required to maintain optimum moisture content of installed materials.

B. Obtain measurements and verify dimensions and details before proceeding with finish carpentry.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Plastic laminate faced lockers to be guaranteed by manufacturer, and Contractor jointly and severally to the Owner for three years, to be free of defects due to faulty materials, workmanship, or performance.

Page 160: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Plastic-Laminate-Clad Lockers The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 064116 - 3

B. Warranty not to include damage sustained as a result of abuse, negligence, use beyond that of it's intended function by the Owner, acts of God, or unnatural events or causes beyond the control of the manufacturer.

C. Include repair and replacement of defective materials and components at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Products of the following manufacturers meeting or exceeding the standards specified herein are acceptable:

1. HOLLMAN, INC. 2. ACCUTEC MANUFACTURING

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Particle Board (Substrate for Laminate Surfaces): High density industrial grade with a minimum density of 45 pounds per cubic foot and a moisture content between 9% maximum and 6% minimum, meeting or exceeding ANSI A208.1 Grade M-3 or ASTM D1037.

B. Plastic Laminate: Conform to the requirements of the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) Publication Number LD-3. Plastic laminate shall be WILSONART, FORMICA, PIONITE, or NEVAMAR. Colors, patterns and finishes shall be as selected by Architect from the manufacturer's full range of standard colors, patterns and finishes. Manufacturer, finish and color to match plastic laminate specified in Section 06400.

1. General Purpose Horizontal Grade: 0.05 inches thick. 2. General Purpose Vertical Grade: 0.028 inches thick. 3. Backing Sheet Grade: 0.02 inches thick. 4. Post-Forming Grade: 0.042 inches thick. 5. Locker Liner: 0.02 inches thick. 6. Fill and seal plastic laminate joints with Seamfil by KAMPEL ENTERPRISES, INC. or

FormFill by FORMFILL PRODUCTS (UNIKA USA). Colors specifically mixed by manufacturer to match plastic laminate.

C. Pressure Fused Laminate/Interior Surfacing

1. Melamine resin impregnated, 100 gram PSM minimum, surface laminated to core under pressure.

2. Meet NEMA LD3.1-1991 GP28 standards and NEMA LD3-1991 CL20 standards. 3. Shall be balanced at all concealed surfaces with phenolic backer. Unsurfaced coreboard

not allowed.

D. Hardware Items: All exposed hardware to be satin stainless steel finish.

1. Number disk, 1-1/2’’ Dia. flush mounted disc with 3/8’’ high contrast digits. US Block 1L

font.

Page 161: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Plastic-Laminate-Clad Lockers The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 064116 - 4

2. Coat Rod, 1’’ Dia. recessed rod. 3. Coat Hook(s), 2-prong metal hooks. 4. Hinges are nickel finished, concealed, heavy duty European steel allowing 110 degree

door opening with a limited lifetime warranty. a. 4 hinges per door 60’’ H & over. b. 3 hinges per door 36’’ --- 59’’ H. c. 2 hinges per door 35’’ H & under.

5. Locks: Centered vertically in door & spaced horizontally per lock type. 6. Venting: 12 millimeter openings between door and top and bottom of locker and dividers

on multiple opening frames provide continuous natural air flow.

E. Glue: Waterproof adhesive (phenol, resorcinol or melamine) base meeting requirements of CS 253 for "Wet Use" unless otherwise specified in specific sections.

F. Locker models 1. Double Tier – 15” W x 18” D 2. Triple Tier – 15” W x 18” D

2.3 FABRICATION - CASEWORK

A. General: Except as specified hereinafter, fabricate all work in accordance with AWI quality standards as specified. Work not specified with a level of quality shall be not less than "Custom” quality per AWI.

1. Provide complete factory-fabricated and finished components which, when assembled on site, will provide an integral system.

2. Provide digilock locks on all lockers 3. Make cut-outs and other provisions for the work of other trades and as indicated or

required for installation. 4. Assemble lockers with accurate router grooves 1/8" deep with glue and nails and screws. 5. Apply plastic laminate to exposed ends after assembly to conceal screws in end cabinet. 6. All particle board panels to be balanced construction.

B. Design

1. Configuration of lockers is indicated on drawings. 2. The detailing and design required to provide rigid, solid and structurally adequate lockers

is the responsibility of the fabricator; within parameters of AWI specifications and as approved by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LOCKER INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Install plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions so that doors will fit openings properly and be accurately aligned.

2. Shim as required using concealed shims. 3. Set and secure lockers in place; rigid, plum and level. 4. Where lockers abut other finished work, scribe and apply filler strips for accurate fit with

concealed fasteners.

Page 162: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

Building Addition & Renovations for Plastic-Laminate-Clad Lockers The Miller Center Recreation and Wellness 064116 - 5

5. Anchor cabinet units securely in place with concealed fasteners, anchored into structural support members of wall construction and adjoining cabinet units. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for support of unit.

6. Conceal interior screw heads with caps to match locker interior. 7. Adjust lockers and hardware so that doors are centered in openings and operate

smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.

8. Secure lockers with anchor devices to suit substrate materials. Minimum pullout force: 100 lbs.

9. Adjust doors and latches/locks to operate easily without bind. 10. Install end panels, filler panels, tops and bases as indicated on the approved shop

drawings. 11. Install accessories.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed upon completion of installation.

1. Patch surfaces damaged by installation to prior condition as approved or replace damaged units as directed.

B. Clean shop-finished surfaces, touch-up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas, as acceptable to Architect.

1. Dust locker interiors. Clean exterior surfaces to original condition.

C. Advise Contractor of procedures and precautions for protection of materials and installed casework from damage by work of other trades.

END OF SECTION 064116

Page 163: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

T ectonic Copyrig ht 2007

10 28 00.E01WARM-AIR DRYER

10 28 00.A08WASTE RECEPTACLE

10 21 13.17.A00PHENOLIC-CORETOILETCOMPARTMENTS

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

E

9' -

0"

4' -

0"4"

2' -

6"

7

A9.5

6"6'

- 0"

6"2'

- 0" 09 30 13.A01

TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

09 30 13.A02TILE TYPE CT-02

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

10 21 13.17.A00PHENOLIC-CORETOILETCOMPARTMENTS

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

10 21 13.17.A00PHENOLIC-CORETOILETCOMPARTMENTS

10 21 13.17.A03PHENOLIC-COREURINAL SCREEN

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

10 28 00.E01WARM-AIR DRYER

10 28 00.A08WASTE RECEPTACLE

MENS1106

10 28 00.A14GRAB BAR

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

E

6"6'

- 0"

6"3'

- 0"

10 28 00.A14GRAB BAR

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A02TILE TYPE CT-02

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

10' -

0"

22 42 13.13COMMERCIAL WATERCLOSETS

CH

ILD

HEI

GH

T14

"

E F

2' -

0"6"

6' -

0"6"

9' -

0"

10 28 00.E01WARM-AIR DRYER

10 28 00.F02DIAPER-CHANGINGSTATION

10 28 00.A08WASTE RECEPTACLE

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 30 13.A02TILE TYPE CT-02

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

EF

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A02TILE TYPE CT-02

10 21 13.17.A00PHENOLIC-CORETOILETCOMPARTMENTS

22 42 13.16COMMERCIALURINALS

26 51 13INTERIOR LIGHTINGFIXTURES, LAMPS,AND BALLASTS

08 83 00MIRRORS

22 42 16.13COMMERCIALLAVATORIES

10 21 13.17.A03PHENOLIC-COREURINAL SCREEN

2' -

0"6"

6' -

0"6"

9' -

0"

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

EF

10 28 00.F02DIAPER-CHANGINGSTATION

10 28 00.A08WASTE RECEPTACLE

10 28 00.E01WARM-AIR DRYER

6"6'

- 0"

6"2'

- 0"

9' -

0"

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

09 30 13.A02TILE TYPE CT-02

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

E F

10 21 13.17.A00PHENOLIC-CORETOILETCOMPARTMENTS

22 42 16.13COMMERCIALLAVATORIES

9' -

0"

2' -

0"6"

6' -

0"6"

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A02TILE TYPE CT-02

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

26 51 13INTERIOR LIGHTINGFIXTURES, LAMPS,AND BALLASTS

08 83 00MIRRORS

10 28 00.E01WARM-AIR DRYER

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

10042

34

24

CASEWORK TYPE

DEPTH

HEIGHT

WIDTH

SEE SHEET A9.6.1 FORCASEWORK DETAILS/SECTIONS

SHEET NUMBER

DRAWING TITLE

SEALS AND SIGNATURES

THIS DRAWING SET IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE. IT IS AND SHALL REMAINTHE PROPERTY OF MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION, WETHER OR NOTTHE PROJECT FOR WHICH IT IS INTENDED IS EXECUTED. THIS PLAN SHALL NOTBE USED ON OTHER PROJECTS, FOR ADDITIONS TO THIS PROJECT, OR FOR THECOMPLETION OF THE PROJECT BY OTHERS EXCEPT BY EXPRESS WRITTENCONSENT OF MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION, THESE DRAWINGS MAYNOT BE REPRODUCED, IN WHOLE OR IN PART. ALL RIGHTS REVERSED.

INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THESE PLANS ARE FOR CODE COMPLIANTDRAWINGS AND BUILDING CODE APPROVAL ONLY. MID-PENN ENGINEERINGCORPORATION ACCEPTS NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE ADEQUACY OFINFORMATION PROVIDED BY OTHER PARTIES AND FOR INFORMATION NOTEXPESSLY DESIGNED BY MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION.

COPYRIGHT, © 2016 MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION

DATE

PROJECT MANAGER:

PROJECT NUMBER

for

DESCRIPTIONREV DATE

2049

WE

ST M

ARKE

T ST

REE

T L

EWIS

BU

RG

, PEN

NSY

LVAN

IA

1783

7PH

ON

E: (5

70) 5

24-2

214

WEB

: ww

w.m

id-p

enne

ngin

eerin

g.co

m

JBP

INTERIOR RESTROOMELEVATIONS

A7.1

60P775-15.5.10

09/26/2016

THE

MIL

LER

CE

NTE

R12

0 H

ardw

ood

Driv

eLe

wis

burg

, PA

1783

7

WEL

LNES

S B

UIL

DIN

G A

DD

ITIO

N &

RE N

OV

ATIO

N

A. REFER TO THE A0.X SERIES SHEETS FOR ARCHITECTURAL GENERAL NOTES,DRAWING, REFERENCE AND MATERIAL SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS, AS WELL ASDIMENSIONING CONVENTIONS USED ON THIS DRAWING.

B. REFER TO AND COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, AND ELECTRICAL FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION NOT SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING.

C. THE PURPOSE OF THIS DRAWING IS TO ILLUSTRATE THE OVERALL CONFIGURATIONOF ALL ITEMS OF ALL TRADES OCCURING ON THE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. LOCATIONSOF ELEMENTS SHOWN ON ELECTRICAL, MECHANICAL, AND PLUMBING DRAWINGSARE SCHEMATIC AND THE DIMENSIONS SHOWN HERE TAKE PRECEDENCE.

D. REFER TO THE A0.2 SERIES SHEETS FOR TYPICAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS FORDIMENSIONS NOT SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING.

E. REFER TO THE 'AF' SERIES SHEETS FOR INTERIOR FINISH INFORMATION.

F. REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATION FOR TILE FINISHES

GENERAL SHEET NOTES

GRAPHIC LEGEND

X SHEET KEYNOTESSCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"

1 13 - a

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"3 2 - d

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"5 13 - c

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"6 Elevation 1 - a

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"7 Elevation 1 - c

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"8 5 - a

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"9 Elevation 1 - b

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"4 4 - b

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"10 4 - d

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"11 13 - b

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"12 13 - d

TYPES DEFINED IN THE "GLASS TYPES" COLUMN OF THE SCHEDULE

TYPE GL-1: CLEAR TYPE GL-1T: TEMPERED CLEARTYPE GL-2: SPANDREL TYPE GL-2T: TEMPERED SPANDRELTYPE GL-3: SILK SCREEN TYPE GL-3T: TEMPERED SILK SCREENTYPE GL-4: TRANSLUCENT TYPE GL-4T: TEMPERED TRANLUCENTTYPE GL-5: 1/4" CLEAR TYPE GL-5T: 1/4" TEMPERED CLEARTYPE GL-6: 1/4" TRANSLUCENT TYPE GL-6T: 1/4" TEMPERED TRANSLUCENT

GLASS TYPES

2 ADDENDUM #2 10/26

2

Page 164: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

T ectonic Copyrig ht 2007T ectonic Copyrig ht 2007

4

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A02TILE TYPE CT-02

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

10 21 13.17.A00PHENOLIC-CORETOILETCOMPARTMENTS

10 28 00.F02DIAPER-CHANGINGSTATION

2' -

0"6"

6' -

0"6"

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

4

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A02TILE TYPE CT-02

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

10 21 13.17.A00PHENOLIC-CORETOILETCOMPARTMENTS

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

6"6'

- 0"

6"2'

- 0"

9' -

0"

4

9' -

0"

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

26 51 13INTERIOR LIGHTINGFIXTURES, LAMPS,AND BALLASTS

08 83 00MIRRORS

22 42 16.13COMMERCIALLAVATORIES

10 28 00.A08WASTE RECEPTACLE

2' -

0"6"

6' -

0"6"

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A02TILE TYPE CT-02

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

4

10 21 13.17.A00PHENOLIC-CORETOILETCOMPARTMENTS

10 21 13.17.A03PHENOLIC-COREURINAL SCREEN

22 42 13.16COMMERCIALURINALS

9' -

0"

6' -

6"6"

2' -

0" 09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A02TILE TYPE CT-02

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

26 51 13INTERIOR LIGHTINGFIXTURES, LAMPS,AND BALLASTS08 83 00MIRRORS

10 21 13.17.A00PHENOLIC-CORETOILETCOMPARTMENTS

22 42 13.16COMMERCIALURINALS

22 42 16.13COMMERCIALLAVATORIES

26 51 13INTERIOR LIGHTINGFIXTURES, LAMPS,AND BALLASTS

08 83 00MIRRORS

10 28 00.E01WARM-AIR DRYER

22 42 16.13COMMERCIALLAVATORIES

10 28 00.A08WASTE RECEPTACLE

10 21 13.17.A03PHENOLIC-COREURINAL SCREEN

22 42 13.16COMMERCIALURINALS

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A02TILE TYPE CT-02

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

08 83 00MIRRORS

22 42 16.13COMMERCIALLAVATORIES

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

6"6'

- 0"

6"2'

- 0"

9' -

0"

10 21 13.17.A00PHENOLIC-CORETOILETCOMPARTMENTS

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

10 28 00.A14GRAB BAR

10 28 00.F02DIAPER-CHANGINGSTATION

9' -

0"

2' -

0"6"

6' -

0"6"

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A02TILE TYPE CT-02

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

6"6'

- 0"

6"2'

- 0"

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A02TILE TYPE CT-02

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

10 28 00.A14GRAB BAR

10 28 00.B03SHOWER CURTAIN

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

10 28 00.A14GRAB BAR

10 28 00.B03SHOWER CURTAIN

10 28 00.B04FOLDING SHOWERSEAT6"

6' -

0"6"

2' -

0"

9' -

0"

09 30 13.A02TILE TYPE CT-02

10 28 00.E01WARM-AIR DRYER

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A02TILE TYPE CT-02

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

08 83 00MIRRORS

10 28 00.A14GRAB BAR

22 42 16.13COMMERCIALLAVATORIES

22 42 13.13COMMERCIAL WATERCLOSETS

10 28 00.B04FOLDING SHOWERSEAT

6"6'

- 0"

6"2'

- 0"

9' -

0"

10042

34

24

CASEWORK TYPE

DEPTH

HEIGHT

WIDTH

SEE SHEET A9.6.1 FORCASEWORK DETAILS/SECTIONS

SHEET NUMBER

DRAWING TITLE

SEALS AND SIGNATURES

THIS DRAWING SET IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE. IT IS AND SHALL REMAINTHE PROPERTY OF MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION, WETHER OR NOTTHE PROJECT FOR WHICH IT IS INTENDED IS EXECUTED. THIS PLAN SHALL NOTBE USED ON OTHER PROJECTS, FOR ADDITIONS TO THIS PROJECT, OR FOR THECOMPLETION OF THE PROJECT BY OTHERS EXCEPT BY EXPRESS WRITTENCONSENT OF MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION, THESE DRAWINGS MAYNOT BE REPRODUCED, IN WHOLE OR IN PART. ALL RIGHTS REVERSED.

INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THESE PLANS ARE FOR CODE COMPLIANTDRAWINGS AND BUILDING CODE APPROVAL ONLY. MID-PENN ENGINEERINGCORPORATION ACCEPTS NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE ADEQUACY OFINFORMATION PROVIDED BY OTHER PARTIES AND FOR INFORMATION NOTEXPESSLY DESIGNED BY MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION.

COPYRIGHT, © 2016 MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION

DATE

PROJECT MANAGER:

PROJECT NUMBER

for

DESCRIPTIONREV DATE

2049

WE

ST M

ARKE

T ST

REE

T L

EWIS

BU

RG

, PEN

NSY

LVAN

IA

1783

7PH

ON

E: (5

70) 5

24-2

214

WEB

: ww

w.m

id-p

enne

ngin

eerin

g.co

m

JBP

INTERIOR RESTROOMELEVATIONS

A7.2

60P775-15.5.10

09/26/2016

THE

MIL

LER

CE

NTE

R12

0 H

ardw

ood

Driv

eLe

wis

burg

, PA

1783

7

WEL

LNES

S B

UIL

DIN

G A

DD

ITIO

N &

RE N

OV

ATIO

N

A. REFER TO THE A0.X SERIES SHEETS FOR ARCHITECTURAL GENERAL NOTES,DRAWING, REFERENCE AND MATERIAL SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS, AS WELL ASDIMENSIONING CONVENTIONS USED ON THIS DRAWING.

B. REFER TO AND COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, AND ELECTRICAL FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION NOT SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING.

C. THE PURPOSE OF THIS DRAWING IS TO ILLUSTRATE THE OVERALL CONFIGURATIONOF ALL ITEMS OF ALL TRADES OCCURING ON THE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. LOCATIONSOF ELEMENTS SHOWN ON ELECTRICAL, MECHANICAL, AND PLUMBING DRAWINGSARE SCHEMATIC AND THE DIMENSIONS SHOWN HERE TAKE PRECEDENCE.

D. REFER TO THE A0.2 SERIES SHEETS FOR TYPICAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS FORDIMENSIONS NOT SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING.

E. REFER TO THE 'AF' SERIES SHEETS FOR INTERIOR FINISH INFORMATION.

F. REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATION FOR TILE FINISHES

GENERAL SHEET NOTES

GRAPHIC LEGEND

X SHEET KEYNOTES

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"1 Elevation 10 - a

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"2 Elevation 10 - c

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"33 Elevation 12 - a

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"4 Elevation 9 - c

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"55 Elevation 9 - b

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"66 Elevation 9 - d

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"7 8 - a

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"9 Elevation 10 - b

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"3 9 - a

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"5 9 - b

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"6 9 - c

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"10 9 - d

TYPES DEFINED IN THE "GLASS TYPES" COLUMN OF THE SCHEDULE

TYPE GL-1: CLEAR TYPE GL-1T: TEMPERED CLEARTYPE GL-2: SPANDREL TYPE GL-2T: TEMPERED SPANDRELTYPE GL-3: SILK SCREEN TYPE GL-3T: TEMPERED SILK SCREENTYPE GL-4: TRANSLUCENT TYPE GL-4T: TEMPERED TRANLUCENTTYPE GL-5: 1/4" CLEAR TYPE GL-5T: 1/4" TEMPERED CLEARTYPE GL-6: 1/4" TRANSLUCENT TYPE GL-6T: 1/4" TEMPERED TRANSLUCENT

GLASS TYPES

Page 165: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A02TILE TYPE CT-02

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

10 28 00.B03SHOWER CURTAIN

10 28 00.B02SHOWER CURTAINROD

C-1609

09 30 13.G02METAL EDGE STRIPAROUND OPENING

1' -

0"6"

6' -

0"6"

8' -

0"

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-0109 30 13.A02TILE TYPE CT-02

10 28 00.B03SHOWER CURTAIN

10 28 00.B02SHOWER CURTAINROD

10 28 00.A14GRAB BAR

10 28 00.B04FOLDING SHOWERSEAT

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

6"6'

- 0"

6"1'

- 0"

8' -

0"

* TILE ALL SIDES OF SHOWER

1' -

0"6"

6' -

0"6"

6' -

3"

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A02TILE TYPE CT-02

10 28 00.B02SHOWER CURTAINROD

10 28 00.B04FOLDING SHOWERSEAT

10 28 00.B03SHOWER CURTAIN

10 28 00.A14GRAB BAR

* TILE ALL SIDES OF SHOWERS

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-0109 30 13.A02TILE TYPE CT-02

10 28 00.B02SHOWER CURTAINROD

10 28 00.B03SHOWER CURTAIN

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

6"6'

- 0"

6"1'

- 0"

8' -

0"

10 51 23.A00PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLADWOOD LOCKER(S)

??

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

10 51 23.A00PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLADWOOD LOCKER(S)

??

4"6'

- 0"

1' -

6"

2' -

0"6"

6' -

0"6"

9' -

0"

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A02TILE TYPE CT-02

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

10 21 13.17.A00PHENOLIC-CORETOILETCOMPARTMENTS

10 21 13.17.A00PHENOLIC-CORETOILETCOMPARTMENTS10 28 00.E01

WARM-AIR DRYER

10 28 00.E01WARM-AIR DRYER

22 42 16.13COMMERCIALLAVATORIES

26 51 13INTERIOR LIGHTINGFIXTURES, LAMPS,AND BALLASTS

09 30 13.A02TILE TYPE CT-02

09 30 13.A01TILE TYPE CT-01

09 30 13.A05TILE TYPE CB-01

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

6"6'

- 0"

6"2'

- 0"

9' -

0"8' - 0"

08 83 00MIRRORS

10 21 13.17.A00PHENOLIC-CORETOILETCOMPARTMENTS

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

4"6'

- 0"

(5) @ 1' - 3" EA

6' - 3"

10 51 23.A00PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLADWOOD LOCKER(S)

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

10 51 23.B01LOCKER BENCH

10 51 23.A00PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLADWOOD LOCKER(S)

4' - 0"

1' -

6"

6' -

0"4"

ADA ACCESSIBLE

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

10 51 23.A00PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLADWOOD LOCKER(S)

4"6'

- 0"

(8) @ 1' - 3" EA

10' - 0"

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

10 51 23.A00PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLADWOOD LOCKER(S)

6' -

0"4"

(7) @ 1' - 3" EA

8' - 9"

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

09 91 23INTERIOR PAINTING

10042

34

24

CASEWORK TYPE

DEPTH

HEIGHT

WIDTH

SEE SHEET A9.6.1 FORCASEWORK DETAILS/SECTIONS

SHEET NUMBER

DRAWING TITLE

SEALS AND SIGNATURES

THIS DRAWING SET IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE. IT IS AND SHALL REMAINTHE PROPERTY OF MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION, WETHER OR NOTTHE PROJECT FOR WHICH IT IS INTENDED IS EXECUTED. THIS PLAN SHALL NOTBE USED ON OTHER PROJECTS, FOR ADDITIONS TO THIS PROJECT, OR FOR THECOMPLETION OF THE PROJECT BY OTHERS EXCEPT BY EXPRESS WRITTENCONSENT OF MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION, THESE DRAWINGS MAYNOT BE REPRODUCED, IN WHOLE OR IN PART. ALL RIGHTS REVERSED.

INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THESE PLANS ARE FOR CODE COMPLIANTDRAWINGS AND BUILDING CODE APPROVAL ONLY. MID-PENN ENGINEERINGCORPORATION ACCEPTS NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE ADEQUACY OFINFORMATION PROVIDED BY OTHER PARTIES AND FOR INFORMATION NOTEXPESSLY DESIGNED BY MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION.

COPYRIGHT, © 2016 MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION

DATE

PROJECT MANAGER:

PROJECT NUMBER

for

DESCRIPTIONREV DATE

2049

WE

ST M

ARKE

T ST

REE

T L

EWIS

BU

RG

, PEN

NSY

LVAN

IA

1783

7PH

ON

E: (5

70) 5

24-2

214

WEB

: ww

w.m

id-p

enne

ngin

eerin

g.co

m

JBP

INTERIORELEVATIONS

A7.3

60P775-15.5.10

09/26/2016

THE

MIL

LER

CE

NTE

R12

0 H

ardw

ood

Driv

eLe

wis

burg

, PA

1783

7

WEL

LNES

S B

UIL

DIN

G A

DD

ITIO

N &

RE N

OV

ATIO

N

A. REFER TO THE A0.X SERIES SHEETS FOR ARCHITECTURAL GENERAL NOTES,DRAWING, REFERENCE AND MATERIAL SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS, AS WELL ASDIMENSIONING CONVENTIONS USED ON THIS DRAWING.

B. REFER TO AND COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, AND ELECTRICAL FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION NOT SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING.

C. THE PURPOSE OF THIS DRAWING IS TO ILLUSTRATE THE OVERALL CONFIGURATIONOF ALL ITEMS OF ALL TRADES OCCURING ON THE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. LOCATIONSOF ELEMENTS SHOWN ON ELECTRICAL, MECHANICAL, AND PLUMBING DRAWINGSARE SCHEMATIC AND THE DIMENSIONS SHOWN HERE TAKE PRECEDENCE.

D. REFER TO THE A0.2 SERIES SHEETS FOR TYPICAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS FORDIMENSIONS NOT SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING.

E. REFER TO THE 'AF' SERIES SHEETS FOR INTERIOR FINISH INFORMATION.

F. REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATION FOR TILE FINISHES

GENERAL SHEET NOTES

GRAPHIC LEGEND

X SHEET KEYNOTES

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"3 Elevation 16 - a

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"4 Elevation 3 - b

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"5 Elevation 3 - c

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"6 Elevation 3 - d

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"1 7 - a

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"2 7 - c

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"7 7 - b

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"8 7 - d

SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0"9 7 - a5

SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0"10 7 - b5

SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0"11 7 - d4

SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0"12 7 - d5

TYPES DEFINED IN THE "GLASS TYPES" COLUMN OF THE SCHEDULE

TYPE GL-1: CLEAR TYPE GL-1T: TEMPERED CLEARTYPE GL-2: SPANDREL TYPE GL-2T: TEMPERED SPANDRELTYPE GL-3: SILK SCREEN TYPE GL-3T: TEMPERED SILK SCREENTYPE GL-4: TRANSLUCENT TYPE GL-4T: TEMPERED TRANLUCENTTYPE GL-5: 1/4" CLEAR TYPE GL-5T: 1/4" TEMPERED CLEARTYPE GL-6: 1/4" TRANSLUCENT TYPE GL-6T: 1/4" TEMPERED TRANSLUCENT

GLASS TYPES

2 ADDENDUM #2 10/26

2

Page 166: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

2' -

4 1/

2"10

' - 0

"

12' -

0"

1' -

0"4"

3' -

8"

7

A9.7

10 14 00SIGNAGE

10 14 00SIGNAGE

A112

11 14 13.19TURNSTILES11 14 13.19TURNSTILES11 14 13.19TURNSTILES

10042

34

24

CASEWORK TYPE

DEPTH

HEIGHT

WIDTH

SEE SHEET A9.6.1 FORCASEWORK DETAILS/SECTIONS

STORAGE1204

424 4242

84

RESEARCH1201

EQ 424 24

84

9' - 0" (3 EQ)

SHEET NUMBER

DRAWING TITLE

SEALS AND SIGNATURES

THIS DRAWING SET IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE. IT IS AND SHALL REMAINTHE PROPERTY OF MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION, WETHER OR NOTTHE PROJECT FOR WHICH IT IS INTENDED IS EXECUTED. THIS PLAN SHALL NOTBE USED ON OTHER PROJECTS, FOR ADDITIONS TO THIS PROJECT, OR FOR THECOMPLETION OF THE PROJECT BY OTHERS EXCEPT BY EXPRESS WRITTENCONSENT OF MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION, THESE DRAWINGS MAYNOT BE REPRODUCED, IN WHOLE OR IN PART. ALL RIGHTS REVERSED.

INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THESE PLANS ARE FOR CODE COMPLIANTDRAWINGS AND BUILDING CODE APPROVAL ONLY. MID-PENN ENGINEERINGCORPORATION ACCEPTS NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE ADEQUACY OFINFORMATION PROVIDED BY OTHER PARTIES AND FOR INFORMATION NOTEXPESSLY DESIGNED BY MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION.

COPYRIGHT, © 2016 MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION

DATE

PROJECT MANAGER:

PROJECT NUMBER

for

DESCRIPTIONREV DATE

2049

WE

ST M

ARKE

T ST

REE

T L

EWIS

BU

RG

, PEN

NSY

LVAN

IA

1783

7PH

ON

E: (5

70) 5

24-2

214

WEB

: ww

w.m

id-p

enne

ngin

eerin

g.co

m

JBP

INTERIORELEVATIONS

A7.7

60P775-15.5.10

09/26/2016

THE

MIL

LER

CE

NTE

R12

0 H

ardw

ood

Driv

eLe

wis

burg

, PA

1783

7

WEL

LNES

S B

UIL

DIN

G A

DD

ITIO

N &

RE N

OV

ATIO

N

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"1 ELEAVATION - LOBBY

A. REFER TO THE A0.X SERIES SHEETS FOR ARCHITECTURAL GENERAL NOTES,DRAWING, REFERENCE AND MATERIAL SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS, AS WELL ASDIMENSIONING CONVENTIONS USED ON THIS DRAWING.

B. REFER TO AND COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, AND ELECTRICAL FORADDITIONAL INFORMATION NOT SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING.

C. THE PURPOSE OF THIS DRAWING IS TO ILLUSTRATE THE OVERALL CONFIGURATIONOF ALL ITEMS OF ALL TRADES OCCURING ON THE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. LOCATIONSOF ELEMENTS SHOWN ON ELECTRICAL, MECHANICAL, AND PLUMBING DRAWINGSARE SCHEMATIC AND THE DIMENSIONS SHOWN HERE TAKE PRECEDENCE.

D. REFER TO THE A0.2 SERIES SHEETS FOR TYPICAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS FORDIMENSIONS NOT SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING.

E. REFER TO THE 'AF' SERIES SHEETS FOR INTERIOR FINISH INFORMATION.

F. REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATION FOR TILE FINISHES

GENERAL SHEET NOTES

GRAPHIC LEGEND

X SHEET KEYNOTES

A112 LIVING WALL SYSTEM

TYPES DEFINED IN THE "GLASS TYPES" COLUMN OF THE SCHEDULE

TYPE GL-1: CLEAR TYPE GL-1T: TEMPERED CLEARTYPE GL-2: SPANDREL TYPE GL-2T: TEMPERED SPANDRELTYPE GL-3: SILK SCREEN TYPE GL-3T: TEMPERED SILK SCREENTYPE GL-4: TRANSLUCENT TYPE GL-4T: TEMPERED TRANLUCENTTYPE GL-5: 1/4" CLEAR TYPE GL-5T: 1/4" TEMPERED CLEARTYPE GL-6: 1/4" TRANSLUCENT TYPE GL-6T: 1/4" TEMPERED TRANSLUCENT

GLASS TYPES

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"2 ELEVATION - STORAGE 1204

SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"3 ELEVATION - RESEARCH 1201

2 ADDENDUM #2 10/26

2

2

Page 167: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

BACKING PLATE TYPE B, TYPSEE SHEET A9.2.4

1" T

YP1"

TYP

BACKING PLATE TYPE B, TYPSEE SHEET A9.2.4

1" T

YP1"

TYP

BACKING PLATE TYPE B, TYPSEE I4-A9.2.5

SHIM TOP AND BOTTOMAS REQUIRED

2 X FIRE-TREATED WOOD BASEFRAME CUT TO HEIGHT OFSCHEDULED BASE

2 X FIRE-TREATED WOODSTRETCHER, PROVIDE BETWEEN BASEFRAMES AT 24" O.C. MAXIMUM, TYP

SHIM BASE AS REQUIRED TO LEVEL

3/4" TYP

1" T

YP1"

TYP

A9.356

CLIP WITH SEISMIC CLIP, TYP

32MM HOLE SPACING4" TYP 4" TYP

3/4" TYP

4"

3"

1/2"

2' -

6 1/

2"1/

2"4'

- 0

1/2"

3/4" 2' - 0"

7' -

0"

A9.356

BACKING PLATE TYPE B, TYPSEE SHEET A9.2.4

SHIM TOP AND BOTTOMAS REQUIRED

SHIM TOP AND BOTTOMAS REQUIRED

1" T

YP1"

TYP

2 X FIRE-TREATED WOODBASE FRAME CUT TO HEIGHTOF SCHEDULED BASE

2 X FIRE-TREATED WOODSTRETCHER, PROVIDEBETWEEN BASE FRAMES AT24" O.C. MAXIMUM, TYP

SHIM BASE AS REQUIREDTO LEVEL

2 DRAWERS, EQUAL SIZE

1' -

0"4"

3/4" 2' - 0"

OPENING FOR WALL OVEN,COORDINATE ACTUAL SIZEAND INSTALLATIONREQUIREMENTS WITHOWNER

CLIP WITH SEISMIC CLIP, TYP

32MM HOLE SPACING

ADA,

MAX

IMU

M H

EIG

HT

FOR

CO

NTR

OLS

4' -

0"1/

2"2'

- 11

1/2

"

FINISHED BACK PANEL

3/4" TYP 3/4" TYP

4" TYP4" TYP

BACKING PLATE TYPE B, TYPSEE SHEET A9.2.4

ADJUSTABLE SHELFSTANDARDS EXTEND FULLHEIGHT, TYPICAL AT BASEAND WALL-HUNG CABINETS

FASTENERS

SHIM TOP AND BOTTOMAS REQUIRED

SCRIBE EXPOSED PERIMETER, TYP

CLIP WITH SEISMIC PIN, TYP

32MM HOLE SPACING

U.O.

N.7'

-0"

AFF

2"

VALANCE

1 1/2" TYP. 1 1/2" TYP.

2' -

4"

LED TAPE LIGHT

BACKING PLATE TYPE B, TYPSEE SHEET A9.2.4

ADJUSTABLE SHELFSTANDARDS EXTEND FULLHEIGHT, TYPICAL AT BASEAND WALL-HUNG CABINETS

FASTENERS

SHIM TOP AND BOTTOMAS REQUIRED

SCRIBE EXPOSED PERIMETER, TYP

LED TAPE LIGHT

U.O.

N.7'

-0"

AFF

VALANCE

1 1/2" TYP1 1/2" TYP

32MM HOLE SPACING

CLIP WITH SEISMIC PIN, TYP

2"2'

- 4"

1. REFER TO SPECIFICATION MANUAL SECTIONS 06-02-00 (FINISH CARPENTRY)AND 06-04-00 (CASEWORK) FOR A COMPLETE ENUMERATION OFPERFORMANCE AND FABRICATION GUIDELINES

2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING IN-WALLBLOCKING ADEQUATE FOR THE SUPPORT OF ALL CABINETRY NOTED HEREIN.IN ADDITION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ADEQUATE IN- WALLBLOCKING FOR ANY/ALL FINISH CARPENTRY OR ANCILLARY COMPONENTS(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WALL PANELS, MILLWORK, CUSTOMCASEWORK, GRAPHIC PANELS, BANNERS, ETC.) DESIGNATED AND DETAILEDHEREIN AS RIGIDLY ATTACHED TO WALL ASSEMBLIES OR OTHER STRUCTURALCOMPONENTS. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION XXX FOR BLOCKINGREQUIREMENTS.

3. FOR PLASTIC LAMINATE PANELS: ALL EXPOSED EXTERIOR SURFACES ARETO BE CLAD IN PLASTIC LAMINATE (PL-XX). WOOD GRAIN IS TO RUN UP/DOWNFOR ALL VERTICAL PANELS. ALL PANEL BACKS ARE TO BE CLAD WITH AMELAMINE BACKER SHEET

4. FOR PLASTIC LAMINATE CABINETS: ALL EXPOSED EXTERIOR SURFACES ARETO BE CLAD IN PLASTIC LAMINATE (COLOR AS NOTED) ALL EXPOSED INTERIORSURFACES ARE TO BE CLAD IN WHITE MELAMINE. HIDDEN OR CONCEALEDFACES ARE TO BE CLAD IN A PLASTIC LAMINATE BACKER. DOORS ANDADJUSTABLE SHELVES ARE TO BE FULLY CLAD IN THE SAME PLASTIC LAMINATEAS THE CASE (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE)

5. PROVIDE LOCKS FOR CABINET DOORS (UPPER AND LOWER) UNLESSOTHERWISE NOTED.

6. ALL COUNTERTOPS ARE TO INCLUDE A CONTINUOUS MATCHING 4"BACKSPLASH (UNLESS SHOWN AND NOTED OTHERWISE). ALL BACKSPLASHESARE ASSUMED TO INCLUDE SIDESPLASHES AT ADJOINING WALLS AND/OROTHER VERTICAL INTERRUPTIONS.

6. PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS ARE TO HAVE A 1 1/2" NOSING DEPTHWITH A MATCHING DOELKEN WOODTAPE VINYL EDGE BAND(MANUFACTURER'S BEST MATCH). EDGE BAND MATCHES TO BE SUBMITTEDFOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO FABRICATION. UNDERSIDES OF COUNTER ARETO BECLAD WITH BACKER SHEET.

7. FOR "WET" AREAS: COUNTERTOP/BACKSPLASH SUBSTRATE TO BE MARINEGRADE MDF.

8. ALL SHELVES ARE ADJUSTABLE (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE) SUPPORTEDON 1/4" NICKEL (SPOON-TYPE) SHELF PINS. RECEIVING HOLES TO BE SPACED2" O.C.

9. VERTICAL WALL PANELS ARE TO BE SECURED WITH A COMBINATION OFFRENCH CLEATS AND LOCKING FASTENERS (SEE HAFELE "KEKU" EH SERIES)ACCOUNTING FOR A NOMINAL 3/4" FURRING SPACE BETWEEN THE WALL'SFINISHED FACE AND THE BACK FACE OF THE PANEL. CONNECTORS ARE TO BEARRANGED SO THAT ALL PANELS ARE RIGIDLY AND PERMANENTLY SECUREDWITHOUT THRU-FACE CONNECTORS

1. WORKSURFACE/COUNTERTOP: QUARTZ STONE SURFACE ON 3/4" MDFSUBSTRATE WITH PENCIL-EDGE NOSING.2. WORKSURFACE/COUNTERTOP: PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" SUBSTRATE WITHCOORDINATING 3mm PVC EDGE BAND.3. CASES AND COMPONENTS: PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" MDF SUBSTRATE.4. DOORS AND DRAWER FRONTS: FLUSH PANEL OVERLAY DOORS; PLASTICLAMINATEON 3/4" MDF SUBSTRATE WITH COORDINATING 3mm PVC EDGE BAND (3/4");CONCEALED, EUROPEAN-STYLE HINGES.5. CABINET INTERIORS TO BE WHITE MELAMINE WITH MATCHING MELAMINEADJUSTABLE SHELVES (MATCHING VINYL EDGE TAPE @ ALL SIDES). SHELVESARE ADJUSTABLE (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE) SUPPORTED ON NICKEL (SPOON-TYPE) SHELF PINS. RECEIVING HOLES TO BE SPACED 2" O.C.6. OPEN CUBBIES PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" MDF SUBSTRATE. FINISH PL-1W/COORDINATING3mm PVC EDGE BAND (3/4").7. DOOR/DRAWER PULL (SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR SPECIFIC DESIGNATIONS)8. DRAWERS ON HEAVY-DUTY, FULL EXTENSION, SELF-CLOSING GLIDES.9. SCHEDULED WALL BASE10. 16 GA. HOT ROLLED STEEL WITH CLEAR POWDER COAT MATTE FINISH.11. MDF RIBS SPACED NOT MORE THAN 16" O.C. PROVIDE PENETRATIONS FORWIRE MANAGEM'T.12. COUNTER SUPPORT BRACKETS (12" X 18" U.N.O.) REGULARLY SPACED NOT TOEXCEED 42" A and M HARDWARE [email protected]. 1 1/2" X 1 1/2" X 1/4" STEEL SHELF ANGLE WELDED TO WALL STUDS. SPACESUPPORTS SO THAT WORKSURFACE/COUNTERTOP SPANS NEVER EXCEED 42"O.C.14. WOOD PLANK(WD-2)15. BAMBOO VENEER PLYWOOD (WD-3)16. 1X HARDWOOD TRIM: MAPLE FINISHED TO MATCH (WD-1)17. ACRYLIC RESIN: 3 FORM CHROMA- RP-118. RESIN PANEL (3FORM) ASSEMBLY. REFER TO VENDOR SHOP DRAWING FOR RFTYPE, HARDWARE, JOINTS AND APPLICABLE LIGHTING. REFER TO SPEC SECTION06-4000.19. EXPANSION BOLTS @ 24"O.C.20. CUT OUT ACCESS PANEL FOR ELECTICAL DATA ACCESS.21. WIRE MANAGEMENT GROMMETS. COORDINATE PLACEMENT IN FIELD WITHOWNER22. CONTINUOUS 1 X FURRING - COORDINATE LOCATIONS WITH PANEL-MOUNTINGHARDWARE.23. PANEL CONNECTORS: HAFELE "KEKU: EH SERIES FRAME CONNECTOR AND/OR3/4" FRENCH CLEATS24. HORIZONTAL BRIDGING AND/OR BLOCKING SPACED AS REQ. (NOT GREATERTHAN 32" O.C.) TO SUPPORT VERTICAL FURRING AND CLEATS25. CONTINUOUS METAL CORNER EXTRUSION.26. WASTE CONTAINER - RUBBERMAID MODEL 3540 - O.F.O.I.27. LINEAR STRIP LED LUMINAIRE (SEE LIGHTING DRAWINGS)28. STAINLESS STEEL OFFSET HINGE29. LID STAY HAFELE 372.04.783 HARDWARE BOTH SIDES OF DOOR LID.30. RUBBER STRIP FOR DOOR STOP31. MONITOR ARM32. KEYBOARD TRAY33. LOCKING CPU HOLDER, COORDINATE LOCATION WITH OWNER34. LOCKING DEVICE TO BE COORDINATED WITH OWNER35. TV MOUNTING BRACKET FOR 50" FLAT SCREEN TV (TV OFOI)

X

SHEET NUMBER

DRAWING TITLE

SEALS AND SIGNATURES

THIS DRAWING SET IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE. IT IS AND SHALL REMAINTHE PROPERTY OF MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION, WETHER OR NOTTHE PROJECT FOR WHICH IT IS INTENDED IS EXECUTED. THIS PLAN SHALL NOTBE USED ON OTHER PROJECTS, FOR ADDITIONS TO THIS PROJECT, OR FOR THECOMPLETION OF THE PROJECT BY OTHERS EXCEPT BY EXPRESS WRITTENCONSENT OF MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION, THESE DRAWINGS MAYNOT BE REPRODUCED, IN WHOLE OR IN PART. ALL RIGHTS REVERSED.

INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THESE PLANS ARE FOR CODE COMPLIANTDRAWINGS AND BUILDING CODE APPROVAL ONLY. MID-PENN ENGINEERINGCORPORATION ACCEPTS NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE ADEQUACY OFINFORMATION PROVIDED BY OTHER PARTIES AND FOR INFORMATION NOTEXPESSLY DESIGNED BY MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION.

COPYRIGHT, © 2016 MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION

DATE

PROJECT MANAGER:

PROJECT NUMBER

for

DESCRIPTIONREV DATE

2049

WE

ST M

ARKE

T ST

REE

T L

EWIS

BU

RG

, PEN

NSY

LVAN

IA

1783

7PH

ON

E: (5

70) 5

24-2

214

WEB

: ww

w.m

id-p

enne

ngin

eerin

g.co

m

JBP

MODULAR CASEWORKDETAILS

A9.3.1

60P775-15.5.10

09/26/2016

THE

MIL

LER

CE

NTE

R12

0 H

ardw

ood

Driv

eLe

wis

burg

, PA

1783

7

WEL

LNES

S B

UIL

DIN

G A

DD

ITIO

N &

RE N

OV

ATIO

N

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"1 TALL CABINET - TYPE 424

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"2 WALL OVEN CABINET - TYPE 454 MODIFIED

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"4 OPEN WALL CABINET WITH ADJUSTABLE SHELF - TYPE 300

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"3 WALL CABINET WITH ADJUSTABLE SHELF - TYPE 301 AND 302

GENERAL SHEET NOTES

CASEWORK KEYNOTES

2 ADDENDUM #2 10/26

2

Page 168: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

COUNTERTOP ANDSPLASH AS SCHEDULED

LARGE DRAWERAS REMAINS

A9.356

BACKING PLATE TYPE B, TYPSEE SHEET A9.2.4

SHIM TOP AND BOTTOMAS REQUIRED

SHIM TOP AND BOTTOMAS REQUIRED

1" T

YP1"

TYP

4"

2 X FIRE-TREATED WOODBASE FRAME CUT TO HEIGHTOF SCHEDULED BASE

2 X FIRE-TREATED WOODSTRETCHER, PROVIDEBETWEEN BASE FRAMES AT24" O.C. MAXIMUM, TYP

SHIM BASE AS REQUIREDTO LEVEL

2' -

10"

1 1/

2" T

YP.

4"

4"

3"

NUMBER OF DRAWERSPER AS TYPE, SEE ELEVATIONS

5 1/

2"

SCRIBE EDGES OF COUNTERTOPAND SPLASH AND PROVIDE SEALANTWHERE ADJOINING OTHER CONSTRUCTION

SHIM TOP AND BOTTOMAS REQUIRED

BACKING PLATE TYPE B, TYPSEE SHEET A9.2.4

SHIM TOP AND BOTTOMAS REQUIRED

2 X FIRE-TREATED WOOD BASEFRAME CUT TO HEIGHT OFSCHEDULED BASE

2 X FIRE-TREATED WOODSTRETCHER, PROVIDE BETWEEN BASEFRAMES AT 24" O.C. MAXIMUM, TYP

SHIM BASE AS REQUIRED TO LEVEL

4"1"

TYP

1" T

YP

A9.356

SEALANT

1/8" RADIUSEDGE, TYP

BACK AND SIDESPLASH W.O.

3"

4"

4"1

1/2"

TYP

.

ADJUSTIBLE SHELF

2' -

10"

CLIP WITH SEISMIC CLIP, TYP

32MM HOLE SPACING4" TYP

SCRIBE EDGES OF COUNTERTOPAND SPLASH AND PROVIDE SEALANTWHERE ADJOINING OTHER CONSTRUCTION

SHIM TOP AND BOTTOMAS REQUIRED

BACKING PLATE TYPE B, TYPSEE I4-A9.2.5

SHIM TOP AND BOTTOMAS REQUIRED

2 X FIRE-TREATED WOOD BASEFRAME CUT TO HEIGHT OFSCHEDULED BASE

2 X FIRE-TREATED WOODSTRETCHER, PROVIDE BETWEEN BASEFRAMES AT 24" O.C. MAXIMUM, TYP

SHIM BASE AS REQUIRED TO LEVEL

3/4" TYP

4"1"

TYP

1" T

YP

A9.356

SEALANT

1/8" RADIUSEDGE, TYP BACK AND SIDESPLASH W.O.

CLIP WITH SEISMIC CLIP, TYP

32MM HOLE SPACING4" TYP 4" TYP

3/4" TYP

2' -

10"

4"1

1/2"

TYP

.

4"

3"

SCRIBE EDGES OF COUNTERTOPAND SPLASH AND PROVIDESEALANT WHERE ADJOININGOTHER CONSTRUCTION

SHIM TOP AND BOTTOMAS REQUIREDBACKING PLATE TYPE B, TYPSEE SHEET A9.2.4

SHIM TOP AND BOTTOMAS REQUIRED

2 X FIRE-TREATED WOODBASE FRAME CUT TOHEIGHT OF SCHEDULEDBASE

2 X FIRE-TREATED WOODSTRETCHER, PROVIDEBETWEEN BASE FRAMES AT24" O.C. MAXIMUM, TYP

SHIM BASE AS REQUIREDTO LEVEL

4"1"

TYP

1" T

YP

A9.356

SEALANT

WIRE PULL, TYP

1/8" RADIUSEDGE, TYP

BACK AND SIDESPLASH W.O.

CLIP WITH SEISMIC PIN, TYP

32MM HOLE SPACING

4" TYP

3/4" TYP

4" TYP

3/4" TYP

4"2'

- 10

"

1 1/

2" T

YP.

4"

3"

SCRIBE EDGES OF COUNTERTOPAND SPLASH AND PROVIDE SEALANTWHERE ADJOINING OTHER CONSTRUCTION

SHIM TOP AND BOTTOMAS REQUIRED

BACKING PLATE TYPE B, TYPSEE SHEET A9.2.4

SHIM TOP AND BOTTOMAS REQUIRED

2 X FIRE-TREATED WOOD BASEFRAME CUT TO HEIGHT OFSCHEDULED BASE

2 X FIRE-TREATED WOODSTRETCHER, PROVIDE BETWEEN BASEFRAMES AT 24" O.C. MAXIMUM, TYP

SHIM BASE AS REQUIRED TO LEVEL

3/4" TYP

4"1"

TYP

1" T

YP

A9.356

SEALANT

WIRE PULL, TYP

1/8" RADIUSEDGE, TYP BACK AND SIDESPLASH W.O.

4" TYP

CLIP WITH SEISMIC CLIP, TYP

32MM HOLE SPACING

4" TYP3/4" TYP

4"2'

- 10

"

3"

4"1

1/2"

TYP

.

BASE CABINET DOOR

CONTINUOUS 2X4

3/8" DIA KB-TZ@16" 0.C.; 2" MIN EMBED

CONTINUOUS 2X

BASE AS SCHEDULED

LAG SCREW

INTERIOR OF CABINET

4" T

YP. 3" TYP.

BASE CABINET DOOR

TOELESS BASE TOMATCH ADJACENTSCHEDULED BASE

INTERIOR OF CABINET

1/8"

CLR

14 GA STEEL.SECURE WITH COUNTERSUNK#10 SMS @ 12" O.C.

4" T

YP.

3" TYP.

APRON

FINISH FACE OF PARTITION

SINK - REFER TO PLUMBINGDWGS FOR INFO

CABINET DOOR

PLUMBING PIPING -REFER TO PLUMBINGDWGS & SPECS FOR INFO

FOR TYPICAL NOTES ANDDIMENTIONS, REFER TOSHT I4-A9.6.1

A9.354

PIPE PROTECTION; TYP

BACKING PLATE TYPE B, TYPSEE A9.2.4

2' -

10"

1 1/

2" T

YP.

4"

2 X FIRE-TREATED WOOD BASEFRAME CUT TO HEIGHT OFSCHEDULED BASE

SHIM BASE AS REQUIRED TO LEVEL

6"

COUNTERTOP ANDSPLASH AS SCHEDULED

(2) EQUAL FILE DRAWERSON HEAVY DUTY, FULLEXTENSION SELF-CLOSINGGLIDES

A9.356

BACKING PLATE TYPE B, TYPSEE SHEET A9.2.4

SHIM TOP AND BOTTOMAS REQUIRED

SHIM TOP AND BOTTOMAS REQUIRED

1" T

YP1"

TYP

4"

2 X FIRE-TREATED WOODBASE FRAME CUT TO HEIGHTOF SCHEDULED BASE

2 X FIRE-TREATED WOODSTRETCHER, PROVIDEBETWEEN BASE FRAMES AT24" O.C. MAXIMUM, TYP

SHIM BASE AS REQUIREDTO LEVEL

VAR

IES,

SEE

ELE

VATI

ON

S

1 1/

2" T

YP.

4"

4"

3"

1/8" RADIUSEDGE, TYP

1. REFER TO SPECIFICATION MANUAL SECTIONS 06-02-00 (FINISH CARPENTRY)AND 06-04-00 (CASEWORK) FOR A COMPLETE ENUMERATION OFPERFORMANCE AND FABRICATION GUIDELINES

2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING IN-WALLBLOCKING ADEQUATE FOR THE SUPPORT OF ALL CABINETRY NOTED HEREIN.IN ADDITION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ADEQUATE IN- WALLBLOCKING FOR ANY/ALL FINISH CARPENTRY OR ANCILLARY COMPONENTS(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WALL PANELS, MILLWORK, CUSTOMCASEWORK, GRAPHIC PANELS, BANNERS, ETC.) DESIGNATED AND DETAILEDHEREIN AS RIGIDLY ATTACHED TO WALL ASSEMBLIES OR OTHER STRUCTURALCOMPONENTS. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION XXX FOR BLOCKINGREQUIREMENTS.

3. FOR PLASTIC LAMINATE PANELS: ALL EXPOSED EXTERIOR SURFACES ARETO BE CLAD IN PLASTIC LAMINATE (PL-XX). WOOD GRAIN IS TO RUN UP/DOWNFOR ALL VERTICAL PANELS. ALL PANEL BACKS ARE TO BE CLAD WITH AMELAMINE BACKER SHEET

4. FOR PLASTIC LAMINATE CABINETS: ALL EXPOSED EXTERIOR SURFACES ARETO BE CLAD IN PLASTIC LAMINATE (COLOR AS NOTED) ALL EXPOSED INTERIORSURFACES ARE TO BE CLAD IN WHITE MELAMINE. HIDDEN OR CONCEALEDFACES ARE TO BE CLAD IN A PLASTIC LAMINATE BACKER. DOORS ANDADJUSTABLE SHELVES ARE TO BE FULLY CLAD IN THE SAME PLASTIC LAMINATEAS THE CASE (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE)

5. PROVIDE LOCKS FOR CABINET DOORS (UPPER AND LOWER) UNLESSOTHERWISE NOTED.

6. ALL COUNTERTOPS ARE TO INCLUDE A CONTINUOUS MATCHING 4"BACKSPLASH (UNLESS SHOWN AND NOTED OTHERWISE). ALL BACKSPLASHESARE ASSUMED TO INCLUDE SIDESPLASHES AT ADJOINING WALLS AND/OROTHER VERTICAL INTERRUPTIONS.

6. PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS ARE TO HAVE A 1 1/2" NOSING DEPTHWITH A MATCHING DOELKEN WOODTAPE VINYL EDGE BAND(MANUFACTURER'S BEST MATCH). EDGE BAND MATCHES TO BE SUBMITTEDFOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO FABRICATION. UNDERSIDES OF COUNTER ARETO BECLAD WITH BACKER SHEET.

7. FOR "WET" AREAS: COUNTERTOP/BACKSPLASH SUBSTRATE TO BE MARINEGRADE MDF.

8. ALL SHELVES ARE ADJUSTABLE (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE) SUPPORTEDON 1/4" NICKEL (SPOON-TYPE) SHELF PINS. RECEIVING HOLES TO BE SPACED2" O.C.

9. VERTICAL WALL PANELS ARE TO BE SECURED WITH A COMBINATION OFFRENCH CLEATS AND LOCKING FASTENERS (SEE HAFELE "KEKU" EH SERIES)ACCOUNTING FOR A NOMINAL 3/4" FURRING SPACE BETWEEN THE WALL'SFINISHED FACE AND THE BACK FACE OF THE PANEL. CONNECTORS ARE TO BEARRANGED SO THAT ALL PANELS ARE RIGIDLY AND PERMANENTLY SECUREDWITHOUT THRU-FACE CONNECTORS

1. WORKSURFACE/COUNTERTOP: QUARTZ STONE SURFACE ON 3/4" MDFSUBSTRATE WITH PENCIL-EDGE NOSING.2. WORKSURFACE/COUNTERTOP: PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" SUBSTRATE WITHCOORDINATING 3mm PVC EDGE BAND.3. CASES AND COMPONENTS: PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" MDF SUBSTRATE.4. DOORS AND DRAWER FRONTS: FLUSH PANEL OVERLAY DOORS; PLASTICLAMINATEON 3/4" MDF SUBSTRATE WITH COORDINATING 3mm PVC EDGE BAND (3/4");CONCEALED, EUROPEAN-STYLE HINGES.5. CABINET INTERIORS TO BE WHITE MELAMINE WITH MATCHING MELAMINEADJUSTABLE SHELVES (MATCHING VINYL EDGE TAPE @ ALL SIDES). SHELVESARE ADJUSTABLE (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE) SUPPORTED ON NICKEL (SPOON-TYPE) SHELF PINS. RECEIVING HOLES TO BE SPACED 2" O.C.6. OPEN CUBBIES PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" MDF SUBSTRATE. FINISH PL-1W/COORDINATING3mm PVC EDGE BAND (3/4").7. DOOR/DRAWER PULL (SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR SPECIFIC DESIGNATIONS)8. DRAWERS ON HEAVY-DUTY, FULL EXTENSION, SELF-CLOSING GLIDES.9. SCHEDULED WALL BASE10. 16 GA. HOT ROLLED STEEL WITH CLEAR POWDER COAT MATTE FINISH.11. MDF RIBS SPACED NOT MORE THAN 16" O.C. PROVIDE PENETRATIONS FORWIRE MANAGEM'T.12. COUNTER SUPPORT BRACKETS (12" X 18" U.N.O.) REGULARLY SPACED NOT TOEXCEED 42" A and M HARDWARE [email protected]. 1 1/2" X 1 1/2" X 1/4" STEEL SHELF ANGLE WELDED TO WALL STUDS. SPACESUPPORTS SO THAT WORKSURFACE/COUNTERTOP SPANS NEVER EXCEED 42"O.C.14. WOOD PLANK(WD-2)15. BAMBOO VENEER PLYWOOD (WD-3)16. 1X HARDWOOD TRIM: MAPLE FINISHED TO MATCH (WD-1)17. ACRYLIC RESIN: 3 FORM CHROMA- RP-118. RESIN PANEL (3FORM) ASSEMBLY. REFER TO VENDOR SHOP DRAWING FOR RFTYPE, HARDWARE, JOINTS AND APPLICABLE LIGHTING. REFER TO SPEC SECTION06-4000.19. EXPANSION BOLTS @ 24"O.C.20. CUT OUT ACCESS PANEL FOR ELECTICAL DATA ACCESS.21. WIRE MANAGEMENT GROMMETS. COORDINATE PLACEMENT IN FIELD WITHOWNER22. CONTINUOUS 1 X FURRING - COORDINATE LOCATIONS WITH PANEL-MOUNTINGHARDWARE.23. PANEL CONNECTORS: HAFELE "KEKU: EH SERIES FRAME CONNECTOR AND/OR3/4" FRENCH CLEATS24. HORIZONTAL BRIDGING AND/OR BLOCKING SPACED AS REQ. (NOT GREATERTHAN 32" O.C.) TO SUPPORT VERTICAL FURRING AND CLEATS25. CONTINUOUS METAL CORNER EXTRUSION.26. WASTE CONTAINER - RUBBERMAID MODEL 3540 - O.F.O.I.27. LINEAR STRIP LED LUMINAIRE (SEE LIGHTING DRAWINGS)28. STAINLESS STEEL OFFSET HINGE29. LID STAY HAFELE 372.04.783 HARDWARE BOTH SIDES OF DOOR LID.30. RUBBER STRIP FOR DOOR STOP31. MONITOR ARM32. KEYBOARD TRAY33. LOCKING CPU HOLDER, COORDINATE LOCATION WITH OWNER34. LOCKING DEVICE TO BE COORDINATED WITH OWNER35. TV MOUNTING BRACKET FOR 50" FLAT SCREEN TV (TV OFOI)

X

SHEET NUMBER

DRAWING TITLE

SEALS AND SIGNATURES

THIS DRAWING SET IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE. IT IS AND SHALL REMAINTHE PROPERTY OF MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION, WETHER OR NOTTHE PROJECT FOR WHICH IT IS INTENDED IS EXECUTED. THIS PLAN SHALL NOTBE USED ON OTHER PROJECTS, FOR ADDITIONS TO THIS PROJECT, OR FOR THECOMPLETION OF THE PROJECT BY OTHERS EXCEPT BY EXPRESS WRITTENCONSENT OF MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION, THESE DRAWINGS MAYNOT BE REPRODUCED, IN WHOLE OR IN PART. ALL RIGHTS REVERSED.

INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THESE PLANS ARE FOR CODE COMPLIANTDRAWINGS AND BUILDING CODE APPROVAL ONLY. MID-PENN ENGINEERINGCORPORATION ACCEPTS NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE ADEQUACY OFINFORMATION PROVIDED BY OTHER PARTIES AND FOR INFORMATION NOTEXPESSLY DESIGNED BY MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION.

COPYRIGHT, © 2016 MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION

DATE

PROJECT MANAGER:

PROJECT NUMBER

for

DESCRIPTIONREV DATE

2049

WE

ST M

ARKE

T ST

REE

T L

EWIS

BU

RG

, PEN

NSY

LVAN

IA

1783

7PH

ON

E: (5

70) 5

24-2

214

WEB

: ww

w.m

id-p

enne

ngin

eerin

g.co

m

JBP

MODULAR CASEWORKSCHEDULE AND

DETAILS

A9.3

60P775-15.5.10

09/26/2016

THE

MIL

LER

CE

NTE

R12

0 H

ardw

ood

Driv

eLe

wis

burg

, PA

1783

7

WEL

LNES

S B

UIL

DIN

G A

DD

ITIO

N &

RE N

OV

ATIO

N

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"24 BASE CABINET - 3 & 4 DRAWER CABINET - TYPE 230 AND 254

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"22 BASE CABINET - OPEN SHELVES - TYPE 100

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"20 BASE CABINET - TYPE 101 AND 102

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"40 BASE CABINET WITH DRAWER & OPEN ADJUSTABLE SHELF - TYPE 220

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"36 BASE CABINET WITH DRAWER - TYPE 211 AND 212

SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"56 CABINET BASE

SCALE: 3" = 1'-0"54 SINK CABINET DOOR

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"52 ADA SINK CABINET WITH DOOR - TYPE 155

SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"4 BASE FILE CABINET - TYPE 223

GENERAL SHEET NOTES

CASEWORK KEYNOTES

2 ADDENDUM #2 10/26

2

Page 169: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

D3.1

D4.1

D4.1

AD3.14

AD3.1

2

AD3.1

1

AD3.1 3

9

AD4.1

D5.1

D5.1

D5.1

D8.1 D8.1

D8.2

D8.2

D8.2

D8.2

D8.2

D8.2

D3.3

DASED LINE INTICATES APROXIMATE LIMITS OF FLOOR SETTLEMENT AS PER GEOTECHNICAL REPORT

D23.1D7.2D7.2D7.2

D7.2

D8.1

D8.2

D8.2

D8.2

D8.2

D8.1

D7.2

D8.2

D5.1 D5.1

D8.1

D8.1

D8.2

D8.2

D8.2

D8.2

D7.2

D4.1

D8.1

D7.3

D9.1

D9.1

D9.1

D3.3

D3.3

D3.3

D5.1

D9.1

D3.3

17

AD4.1

D8.1

D8.1

D8.1

D4.1

D8.1

D8.1

D7.2

D7.2

D7.2

D7.2

D7.2

D7.2

7

AD4.1

D3.2

5

AD4.1

D3.1

D3.2

D7.2

D7.2

D7.2

D7.2

D7.2

11.1

D3.3

D3.3

11.1

11.1

11.1

11.1

11.1

D5.3

D5.3

D7.3

D7.8 D7.8

D7.8

D7.8

D7.8

30' - 0" 40' - 0" 17' - 7"

13' -

1"

40' -

0"

25' -

0" GC TO VERIFY ACTUAL REQUIREMENTS

DIMESIONS ARE APPROXIMATE BASED ON GEOTECH REPORT

GC

TO

VER

IFY

ACTU

AL R

EQ

UIR

EMEN

TS

DIM

ESIO

NS

AR

E A

PPR

OXI

MAT

E B

ASED

ON

GE

OTE

CH

RE

POR

T

DAS

ED L

INE

INTI

CA

TES

APR

OXI

MA

TE L

IMIT

S O

F FL

OO

R S

ETTL

EMEN

T AS

PER

GE

OTE

CH

NIC

AL R

EPO

RT

D3.3

D3.3

D3.3

GENERAL NOTE 'R' TYP.

19

AD4.1

2

AREA OF EXISTING CONSTRUCITON TO BE DEMOLISHED.

SEE A0.2 FOR ADDITIONAL DEMOLITION SYMBOLS.

SHEET NUMBER

DRAWING TITLE

SEALS AND SIGNATURES

THIS DRAWING SET IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE. IT IS AND SHALL REMAINTHE PROPERTY OF MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION, WETHER OR NOTTHE PROJECT FOR WHICH IT IS INTENDED IS EXECUTED. THIS PLAN SHALL NOTBE USED ON OTHER PROJECTS, FOR ADDITIONS TO THIS PROJECT, OR FOR THECOMPLETION OF THE PROJECT BY OTHERS EXCEPT BY EXPRESS WRITTENCONSENT OF MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION, THESE DRAWINGS MAYNOT BE REPRODUCED, IN WHOLE OR IN PART. ALL RIGHTS REVERSED.

INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THESE PLANS ARE FOR CODE COMPLIANTDRAWINGS AND BUILDING CODE APPROVAL ONLY. MID-PENN ENGINEERINGCORPORATION ACCEPTS NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE ADEQUACY OFINFORMATION PROVIDED BY OTHER PARTIES AND FOR INFORMATION NOTEXPESSLY DESIGNED BY MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION.

COPYRIGHT, © 2016 MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION

DATE

PROJECT MANAGER:

PROJECT NUMBER

for

DESCRIPTIONREV DATE

2049

WE

ST M

ARKE

T ST

REE

T L

EWIS

BU

RG

, PEN

NSY

LVAN

IA

1783

7PH

ON

E: (5

70) 5

24-2

214

WEB

: ww

w.m

id-p

enne

ngin

eerin

g.co

m

JBP

DEMOLITION FLOORPLAN

AD1.1

60P775-15.5.10

09/26/2016

THE

MIL

LER

CE

NTE

R12

0 H

ardw

ood

Driv

eLe

wis

burg

, PA

1783

7

WEL

LNES

S B

UIL

DIN

G A

DD

ITIO

N &

RE N

OV

ATIO

N

A. REFER TO THE A0.X SERIES SHEETS FOR ARCHITECTURAL GENERAL NOTES,DRAWING, REFERENCE AND MATERIAL SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS, AS WELL ASDIMENSIONING CONVENTIONS USED ON THIS DRAWING.

B. EXISTING CONDITIONS SHOWN ARE FROM AVAILABLE RECORD DRAWINGS ANDVISUAL FIELD SURVEYS AND MAY NOT REPRESENT CONDITIONS EXACTLY AS THEYWERE CONSTRUCTED. NEITHER THE OWNER, ARCHITECT NOR ANY AGENT THEREOFWARRANT THE INFORMATION FOR TOTAL ACCURACY OR COMPLETENESS.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ACTUAL EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE SITE PRIORTO SUBMITTING A BID. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT OF ANYDISCREPANCIES.

C. DEMOLITION WORK SHALL BE DONE IN A MANNER WHICH WILL NOT CAUSEUNNECESSARY INCONVIENIENCE OR DANGER TO USERS OF THE PREMISES ANDADJACENT SITE AND NOT INTERFERE WITH ITS OPERATION. PERFORM ALL WORKNECESSARY TO PROTECT THE PUBLIC AS WELL AS ALL IN-PLACE UTILITIES. ALLPATHS OF EGRESS SHALL BE OPEN AND KEPT FREE OF DEBRIS AND ANYOBSTRUCTIONS TO EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.

D. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW THE CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS, EXTENT OFDEMOLITION REQUIRED AND PERFORM ANY ON-SITE INVESTIGATIONS NECESSARY TOCOMPLETE THE DEMOLITION WORK IN ALL RESPECTS FOR SCHEDULED NEWCONSTRUCTION.

E. ANY EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, AND SUPPLIES TEMPORARILY REMOVED FOR THEPURPOSE OF PROTECTION SHALL BE REPLACED IN ORIGINAL LOCATIONS ANDCONDITIONS. ANY MATERIALS DAMAGED SHALL BE REPLACED WITH NEW MATERIALSOF LIKE KIND AND QUALITY.

F. CUTTING AND REMOVAL INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS ARE GENERAL INDICATIONSONLY AND DO NOT NECESSARILY SHOW THE FULL EXTENT OF REMOVAL ANDCUTTING REQUIRED BY JOB CONDITIONS TO PERFORM NEW WORK. REFER TO ANDCOORDINATE WITH STRUCTURAL, CIVIL, MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, AND ELECTRICALDRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL DEMOLITION INFORMATION NOT SHOWN ON THISDRAWING.

G. ALL MATERIALS INDICATED TO BE REMOVED SHALL BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY ANDREMOVED FROM THE SITE.

H. ALL REMOVED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT WHICH IS CLASSIFIED AS "SALVAGE FOROWNER" SHALL REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF THE OWNER. DELIVER SUCH MATERIALSAND EQUIPMENT ON THE PREMISES AS DIRECTED BY THE OWNER AND NEATLYSTORE AND PROTECTE FROM DAMAGE.

J. ALL REMOVED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT WHICH IS CLASSIFIED "SALVAGE FORRELOCATION" SHALL REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF THE OWNER. THE CONTRACTOR ISRESPONSIBLE FOR PLACING ITEMS IN STORAGE ON SITE AND FOR THE PROTECTIONOF THOSE ITEMS. THESE ITEMS WILL BE RELOCATED. REFER TO THE FLOOR PLANSFOR NEW LOCATIONS.

K. PERFORM ALL CUTTING AND REMOVAL REQUIRED FOR ALTERATION WORKCAREFULLY CAUSING NO DAMAGE TO EXISTING MATERIALS LEFT IN PLACE. PATCHAND REPAIR ALL ELEMENTS THAT ARE TO REMAIN WHICH ARE DAMAGED FROM THEDEMOLITION WORK WITH CONSTRUCTION TO MATCH EXISTING CONDITIONS.

L. WHEN PATCHING OR INFILLING EXISTING MATERIALS, INFILL MATERIAL SHALL MATCHEXISTING ADJACENT SURFACES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

M. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ALL NECESSARYTEMPORARY BRACING AND/OR SHORING NECESSARY TO MAINTAIN THE INTEGRITYAND STRUCTURAL STABILITY OF THE BUILDING AND ITS INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS.

N. REMOVE ALL PROTECTIVE BARRIERS, TEMPORARY SHORING, AND MATERIALS FROMTHE SITE RESULTING FROM THE SCOPE OF DEMOLITION WORK.

O. IF UNUSUAL STAINS OR ODORS ARE DETECTED IN SOILS OR ASPHALT, CEASEDEMOLITION OR EXCAVATION OPERATIONS AND NOTIFY OWNER IMMEDIATELY.

P. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE OWNER OF ANY MATERIAL ENCOUNTEREDDURING DEMOLITION OR DURING THE COURSE OF CONSTRUCTION THAT IS SUSPECTOF CONTAINING ASBESTOS. THE OWNER WILL RETAIN AN ASBESTOS ABATEMENTCONTRACTOR TO REMOVE ANY ACM. IN THE EVENT ACM'S ARE ENCOUNTERED THECONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WORK WITH THE OWNER'S ABATEMENTCONTRACTOR.

Q. THE OWNER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO ADD OR DELETE ITEMS TO BE REMOVED ANDSALVAGED AT THEIR DISCRETION.

R. EXISTING CONCRETE FOOTINGS ARE SHOWN NEAR SLAB DEMO LOCATIONS FORDIAGRAMATIC PURPOSES ONLY. GC TO FEILD VERIFY COLUMN SIZES AND LOCATIONSAND TAKE CARE TO NOT UNDERMINE EXISTING FOOTINGS, (TYP.)

S. --

SCALE: 1/16" = 1'-0"

MAIN LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN

DIVISION 03D3.1 DEMOLISH CONCRETE SLAB TO EXTENT INDICATED AND AS REQUIRED TO

STABALIZE SOIL BELOW FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION. REFER TO GEOTECHREPORT AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFO.

D3.2 DEMOLISH CONCRETE PAD FLUSH WITH EXISTING FLOOR TO EXTENTINDICATED, REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONALINFORMATION. TYP. ALL LOCATIONS WHERE PAD IS NOT FLUSH WITH SLAB

D3.3 GC TO DEMOLISH CONCRETE SLAB TO TO ACCEPT NEW CONSTRUCTION.SLAB CUTS TO ALIGN WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION TO ELIMINATE VISIBILITY OFEXISTING CONCRETE IN AREAS WHERE POLISHED CONCRETE FINISH ISEXPOSED; COORDINATE REQIREMENTS WITH ALL TRADES.

DIVISION 04D4.1 DEMOLISH CMU WALL TO EXTENT INDICATED AND AS REQUIRED FOR NEW

CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 05D5.1 DEMOLISH STEEL STAIR, STRUCTURE AND RAILING.D5.3 REMOVE AND RELOCATE EXISTING 'X' BRACING, REFER TO STRUCTURAL

DRAWINGS

DIVISION 07D7.2 CUT OPENING TO ACCEPT NEW CONSTRUCTION; REPAIR ADJACENT

SURFACES AND SALVAGE EXISTING METAL SIDING FOR CUTTING ANDPATCHING.

D7.3 REMOVE AND SALVAGE EXISTING METAL SIDING FOR CUTTING ANDPATCHING.

D7.8 PUNCTURE EXISTING INSULATION VAPOR BARRIER TO ACCEPT NEWADDITIONAL INSULATION AS REQUIRED BY MANUFACTURER , TYPICAL ALLEXISTING EXTERIOR WALLS

DIVISION 08D8.1 REMOVE STEEL DOOR, FRAME AND HARDWARE; REPAIR ADJACENT

SURFACES

D8.2 REMOVE OVERHEAD DOOR, FRAME AND HARDWARE; REPAIR ADJACENTSURFACES

DIVISION 09D9.1 REMOVE EXISTING FINISH; PREPARE CONCRETE SLAB TO RECEIVE NEW

FLOOR FINISHES AS PER MANUFACTURE'S RECOMMENDATIONS; REFER TOFINISH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR COORDINATION AND TOLERANCESU.N.O. IN AREAS RECIEVING POLISED CONCRETE FINISH, ALIGN CUTTING ATTHRESHOLDS TO MINIMIZE EXPOSED FINISH VARIATIONS BETWEEN OLD ANDNEW

DIVISION 1111.1 DEMOLISH LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT, SEALS AND BUMPERS AS INDICATED

AND AS REQUIRED FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 23D23.1 DEMOLISH FAN AND LOUVER; PATCH AND REPAIR AS REQUIRED FOR NEW

CONSTRUCTION.

GRAPHIC LEGEND

GENERAL SHEET NOTES

DEMOLITION KEYNOTESX

0 16' 32' 40'

2 ADDENDUM #2 10/26

Page 170: MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION #2.pdfOct 26, 2016  · This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the original Project Specifications and Drawings dated September

UE UE

9' (TYP)

24'18' (TYP)

STOP STOP

STOP

24'

24'

26'

STOP

24'

STOP

11.2'

24' 24'

24'

24'

24'

6'

6'

BUILDING SETBACK

BU

ILDIN

G S

ETB

AC

K

BUILDING SETBACK

PARKING SETBACK

PAR

KIN

G S

ETB

AC

K

P A R K I N G S E T B A C K

BU

ILDIN

G S

ETB

AC

K

PARKING SETBACK

9' (TYP)

18' (TYP)

9'9'

6.78'

5' CSW

R-4 ROCK

8.99'

5' CSW

T

(DO NOT DISTURB)

(DO NOT DISTURB)

HARDWOOD DRIVE

HARDWOOD DRIVE

OT

OT

OT

OT

OT

OT

O

T

NORT

H 15

TH S

TREE

T

ABBREVIATIONS ALT ALTERNATEASW ASPHALT SIDEWALK

BC BOTTOM OF CURB ELEVATIONAT FINISHED GRADE

BLDG BUILDINGBM BENCH MARKBOP BEGINNING OF PROFILEBVCE BEGIN VERTICAL CURVE

ELEVATIONBVCS BEGIN VERTICAL CURVE

STATIONBW BOTTOM OF WALL ELEVATION

CB CATCH BASINCIP CAST IN PLACECMP CORRUGATED METAL PIPECMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNITCO CLEAN OUTCON CONCRETECP CONTROL POINTCSW CONCRETE SIDEWALK

DEMO DEMOLISH/DEMOLITIONDIA DIAMETERDS DOWN SPOUT

DWG DRAWING

ELEV ELEVATIONEOP END OF PROFILEEQ EQUALEVCE END VERTICAL CURVE

ELEVATIONEECS END VERTICAL CURVE STATIONESMT EASEMENTEW END WALLEX EXISTINGEXP EXPANSION

FES FLARED END SECTIONFG FRAME AND GRATEFTG FOOTING

GALV GALVANIZEDGB GRADE BREAK

HDPE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENEPIPE

HP HIGH POINT

INV INVERT ELEVATIONIP IRON PIN

JT JOINT

LF LINEAR FOOTLP LOW POINT

MH MANHOLEMIN MINIMUMMISC MISCELLANEOUS

OC ON CENTEROS OUTLET STRUCTURE

PC POINT OF CURVATUREPCC POINT OF COMPOUND

CURVATUREPT POINT OF TANGENCY

RW RIGHT-OF-WAY

SLCPP SMOOTH LINED CORRUGATEDPLASTIC PIPE

SS SANITARY SEWERSST STAINLESS STEELSTA STATIONSTD STANDARD

TC TOP OF CURB ELEVATION ATFINISHED GRADE

TB TOP OF BANK ELEVATIONTG TOP OF GRATE ELEVATIONTYP TYPICALTW TOP OF WALL ELEVATION

VB CONCRETE ELECTRIC VAULTBOX

WWF WELDED WIRE FABRICW/ WITHW/O WITHOUT

FEATURE PROPOSEDMINOR CONTOURMAJOR CONTOUR

STABILIZEDEDGE OF PAVE

CURBINGCENTERLINE

RIGHT OF WAYEASEMENT

STORM SEWER GGAS LINE OEOVERHEAD ELECTRIC OTOVERHEAD TELEPHONE SSANITARY SEWER UEUNDERGROUND ELECTRIC WWATER LINE

PROPERTY LINE

HATCH PROPOSED

PAVED AREA

STANDARD CONCRETE

STABILIZED AREA

500498

LEGEND

ADJOINING PROPERTY LINE

BUILDING

SYMBOLS PROPOSED

UTILITY POLE

WATER VALVE W V

FIRE HYDRANT HY D

GAS VALVE G V

TRAFFIC SIGN

TRAFFIC RATED CONCRETE

SHEET NUMBER

SHEET TITLE

SEALS AND SIGNATURES

THIS DRAWING SET IS AN INSTRUMENT OF SERVICE. IT IS AND SHALL REMAIN

THE PROPERTY OF MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION, WETHER OR NOT

THE PROJECT FOR WHICH IT IS INTENDED IS EXECUTED. THIS PLAN SHALL NOT

BE USED ON OTHER PROJECTS, FOR ADDITIONS TO THIS PROJECT, OR FOR THE

COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT BY OTHERS EXCEPT BY EXPRESS WRITTEN

CONSENT OF MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION, THESE DRAWINGS MAY

NOT BE REPRODUCED, IN WHOLE OR IN PART. ALL RIGHTS REVERSED.

INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THESE PLANS ARE FOR CODE COMPLIANT

DRAWINGS AND BUILDING CODE APPROVAL ONLY. MID-PENN ENGINEERING

CORPORATION ACCEPTS NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE ADEQUACY OF

INFORMATION PROVIDED BY OTHER PARTIES AND FOR INFORMATION NOT

EXPESSLY DESIGNED BY MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION.

COPYRIGHT, © 2016 MID-PENN ENGINEERING CORPORATION

DATE

DWG COORD: PROJECT MGR:

PROJECT NUMBER

fo

r

DESCRIPTIONREV DATE

2049 W

ES

T M

AR

KE

T S

TR

EE

T LE

WIS

BU

RG

, P

EN

NS

YLV

AN

IA

17837

PH

ON

E: (570) 524-2214 W

EB

: w

ww

.m

id-pennengineering.com

BASDJU

SEPTEMBER 1, 2016

60P775-15-5.10

TH

E M

IL

LE

R C

EN

TE

R

120 H

ardw

ood D

rive

Lew

isburg, P

A 17837

CO

NS

TR

UC

TIO

N D

RA

WIN

GS

FO

R

RA

CP

G

RA

NT

P

RO

JE

CT

ARCHITECTURAL

SITE PLAN

AS1.10

00 40' 80'

SCALE IN FEET

40'

AS1.1ALT-1

AS1.2ALT-3

AS1.2ALT-3

AS1.3ALT-3

GENERAL SHEET NOTES:1. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION EASEMENT ON BUFFALO VALLEY RECREATION AUTHORITY

PROPERTY TO ACCOMMODATE CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES FOR THE MILLER CENTER PROJECT.ANY WORK ON BVRA PROPERTY MUST BE LIMITED TO THE TEMPORARY EASEMENT AREA ANDMUST COMPLY WITH THE TEMPORARY DEED OF EASEMENT. CONTRACTOR SHALL BERESPONSIBLE TO COORDINATE ALL CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES WITHIN THE TEMPORARYEASEMENT WITH BVRA AND MUST PROVIDE SAFETY MEASURES SUCH AS CONSTRUCTIONFENCING TO PROTECT PEDESTRIANS FROM THE WORK ZONE. ANY DAMAGES ON BVRAPROPERTY SHALL BE REPLACED IN KIND AT THE RACP CONTRACTORS SOLE EXPENSE.

2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES ANDSEQUENCING WITH THE SITE CONTRACTORS AS THE PROJECTS WILL OCCURSIMULTANEOUSLY.

jbm101
Highlight
jbm101
Highlight
jbm101
Highlight
jbm101
Callout
The Building GC is responsible for the exterior stair, ramp and railings system.
jbm101
Highlight
jbm101
Highlight
jbm101
Highlight
jbm101
Highlight
jbm101
Callout
The SIte Contractor is responsible for the Concrete Sidewalk
jbm101
Callout
The Building GC is responsible for this equipment pad and railing.
jbm101
Highlight
jeremy
Callout
.
jeremy
Callout
.
jeremy
Rectangle
jeremy
Rectangle